RTN 605 Maintenance Guide (V100R005C00 - 03)

OptiX RTN 605 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00
Maintenance Guide
Issue Date 03 2010-05-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide
About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 605 1D/2D/1E/2E iManager U2000 Version V100R005C00 V100R002C00
Product Name OptiX RTN 605 1F/2F iManager U2000
Version V100R003C00 V100R002C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for the maintenance engineers of the OptiX RTN 605. Before reading this document, you need to:
l l l
Network planning engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

This document is the third release of the V100R005C00 version.

This document is the second release of the V100R005C00 version.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
About This Document
Update A Alarm Reference
Description Deleted the alarm SWDL_PKGVER_MM.

This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................1-1 1.2 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Flammable Air Environment...........................................................................................................................1-5 1.4 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................1-5 1.5 Working at Heights.........................................................................................................................................1-6 1.6 Mechanical Safety...........................................................................................................................................1-9 1.7 Other Precautions..........................................................................................................................................1-10
2 Guides to High-Risk Operations............................................................................................2-1

2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever Switch.....................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Operation Guide to IF Jumpers.......................................................................................................................2-3 2.3 Operation Guide to IF Cables..........................................................................................................................2-4
3 Routine Maintenance................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Routine Maintenance Items.............................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Guidelines for Routine Maintenance Items.....................................................................................................3-3 3.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs....................................................................................................................3-4 3.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms.................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events.............................................................................................................3-6 3.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance........................................................................................................3-7 3.2.6 Browsing the History Performance........................................................................................................3-8 3.2.7 Browsing the History Transmit Power and Receive Power...................................................................3-9 3.2.8 Testing IF 1+1 Switching.....................................................................................................................3-10 3.2.9 Checking the Equipment Room...........................................................................................................3-11 3.2.10 Checking the ODU.............................................................................................................................3-11 3.2.11 Checking the Hybrid Coupler............................................................................................................3-12 3.2.12 Checking the Antenna........................................................................................................................3-12 3.2.13 Checking the IF Cables......................................................................................................................3-13 3.2.14 Checking the LOS Condition.............................................................................................................3-14
4 Emergency Maintenance...........................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Definition of Emergency.................................................................................................................................4-2 Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
4.2 Purposes of Emergence Maintenance..............................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Procedure of Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................4-2
5 Troubleshooting.........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruption.............................................................................................................5-4 5.3 Troubleshooting Radio Links..........................................................................................................................5-9 5.4 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment...................................................................5-17 5.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults......................................................................................................5-19 5.6 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults................................................................................................................5-24
6 Part Replacement........................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Replacing the IDU...........................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Replacing an ODU..........................................................................................................................................6-2 6.3 Replacing the IF Cable....................................................................................................................................6-4
7 Supporting Task.........................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Hardware Loopback........................................................................................................................................7-3 7.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters........................................................................................................7-3 7.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners...........................................................................7-3 7.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue......................................................................................7-5 7.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.......................................................................7-6 7.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events.....................................................................7-7 7.3.1 Checking the NE Status..........................................................................................................................7-8 7.3.2 Checking the Board Status.....................................................................................................................7-9 7.3.3 Browsing the Current Alarms................................................................................................................7-9 7.3.4 Browsing History Alarms.....................................................................................................................7-10 7.3.5 Browsing the Abnormal Events...........................................................................................................7-11 7.3.6 Browsing Current Performance Events................................................................................................7-12 7.3.7 Browsing the History Performance......................................................................................................7-12 7.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records..........................................................7-14 7.4 Querying a Report.........................................................................................................................................7-14 7.4.1 Querying a Board Information Report Through the Web LCT............................................................7-15 7.4.2 Querying a Board Manufacture Information Report............................................................................7-15 7.4.3 Querying the Status of a Radio Link....................................................................................................7-16 7.5 Software loopback.........................................................................................................................................7-17 7.5.1 Setting Tributary Loopback.................................................................................................................7-17 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port..........................................................................................................7-18 7.5.3 Setting Loopback for the Ethernet Port of the RTN 605 1F/2F...........................................................7-19 7.5.4 Locating the Fault by Performing Loopbacks......................................................................................7-20 7.6 SCC Resetting...............................................................................................................................................7-22 7.7 PRBS Test.....................................................................................................................................................7-22 7.7.1 PRBS Test of the Tributary Unit..........................................................................................................7-22 7.7.2 PRBS Test of the IF Unit.....................................................................................................................7-24 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Contents
7.8 Setting the Automatic Release Function.......................................................................................................7-26 7.9 Configuring Performance Monitoring Status of NEs....................................................................................7-26 7.10 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel.................................................................................................7-27 7.11 Querying the Working Status of an Ethernet Port.......................................................................................7-28 7.12 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port.........................................................7-28 7.13 Performing Statistics for the Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port..................................................................7-29
A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Alarm List......................................................................................................................................................A-2 A.2 Alarms and Handling Procedures..................................................................................................................A-5 A.2.1 BD_STATUS.......................................................................................................................................A-5 A.2.2 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT......................................................................................................................A-6 A.2.3 DBMS_ERROR...................................................................................................................................A-8 A.2.4 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE...............................................................................................................A-10 A.2.5 DOWN_E1_AIS.................................................................................................................................A-11 A.2.6 E1_LOC..............................................................................................................................................A-12 A.2.7 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE...................................................................................................................A-13 A.2.8 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI....................................................................................................................A-15 A.2.9 ETH_CFM_LOC................................................................................................................................A-17 A.2.10 ETH_CFM_RDI...............................................................................................................................A-19 A.2.11 ETH_LOS.........................................................................................................................................A-21 A.2.12 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL........................................................................................................A-22 A.2.13 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT....................................................................................................A-24 A.2.14 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP..................................................................................................................A-25 A.2.15 ETHOAM_RMT_SD.......................................................................................................................A-27 A.2.16 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP.................................................................................................................A-28 A.2.17 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS.................................................................................................................A-30 A.2.18 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT....................................................................................................A-32 A.2.19 FLOW_OVER..................................................................................................................................A-34 A.2.20 HARD_BAD....................................................................................................................................A-35 A.2.21 IF_CABLE_OPEN...........................................................................................................................A-37 A.2.22 IF_INPWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................A-38 A.2.23 LAG_PORT_FAIL...........................................................................................................................A-40 A.2.24 LOOP_ALM.....................................................................................................................................A-42 A.2.25 MSSW_DIFFERENT.......................................................................................................................A-44 A.2.26 MW_BER_EXC...............................................................................................................................A-46 A.2.27 MW_BER_SD..................................................................................................................................A-47 A.2.28 MW_FEC_UNCOR.........................................................................................................................A-48 A.2.29 MW_LIM.........................................................................................................................................A-53 A.2.30 MW_LOF.........................................................................................................................................A-54 A.2.31 MW_RDI..........................................................................................................................................A-59 A.2.32 NESF_LOST....................................................................................................................................A-60 A.2.33 NESTATE_INSTALL......................................................................................................................A-62 Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide A.2.34 POWER_ALM.................................................................................................................................A-63 A.2.35 R_LOC.............................................................................................................................................A-64 A.2.36 R_LOF..............................................................................................................................................A-65 A.2.37 R_LOS..............................................................................................................................................A-67 A.2.38 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF..........................................................................................A-68 A.2.39 RADIO_MUTE................................................................................................................................A-70 A.2.40 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH............................................................................................................A-71 A.2.41 RADIO_RSL_HIGH........................................................................................................................A-72 A.2.42 RADIO_RSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................A-74 A.2.43 RADIO_TSL_HIGH........................................................................................................................A-75 A.2.44 RADIO_TSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................A-76 A.2.45 RELAY_ALARM............................................................................................................................A-77 A.2.46 RP_LOC...........................................................................................................................................A-78 A.2.47 RPS_INDI.........................................................................................................................................A-79 A.2.48 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT..................................................................................................A-81 A.2.49 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH..........................................................................................................A-82 A.2.50 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL.................................................................................................................A-83 A.2.51 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH.....................................................................................................A-83 A.2.52 SWDL_INPROCESS.......................................................................................................................A-84 A.2.53 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK..................................................................................................................A-85 A.2.54 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT..............................................................................................................A-86 A.2.55 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL............................................................................................................A-87 A.2.56 T_ALOS...........................................................................................................................................A-87 A.2.57 TEMP_ALARM...............................................................................................................................A-89 A.2.58 UP_E1_AIS......................................................................................................................................A-90 A.2.59 VOLT_LOS......................................................................................................................................A-91
B Abnormal Event Reference.....................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Important Abnormal Events...........................................................................................................................B-2 B.2 Important Abnormal Events and Handling Procedures.................................................................................B-2 B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................................B-2 B.2.2 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit............................................................................B-4 B.2.3 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit............................................................................B-5
C Performance Event Reference................................................................................................C-1

C.1 Performance Event List..................................................................................................................................C-2 C.1.1 Microwave Performance Events...........................................................................................................C-2 C.1.2 Other Performance Events....................................................................................................................C-4 C.2 Performance Events and Handling Procedures..............................................................................................C-5 C.2.1 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST.......................................................................................C-5 C.2.2 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS...............................................................................C-6 C.2.3 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG...........................................................................C-7 C.2.4 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG..........................................................................C-8 C.2.5 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, and TLLTT................................................................................................C-8 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Contents
C.2.6 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT, and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT.........................C-9 C.2.7 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, and QAMWS256.......................C-10 C.2.8 BDTMPMAX, BDTMPMIN, and BDTMPCUR...............................................................................C-10
D RMON Event Reference.........................................................................................................D-1

D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries........................................................................................................................D-2 D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries..............................................................................................................D-2 D.3 RMON Alarm Clearance Reference..............................................................................................................D-4 D.3.1 UndersizePkts.......................................................................................................................................D-4 D.3.2 OversizePkts.........................................................................................................................................D-5 D.3.3 Fragments.............................................................................................................................................D-6 D.3.4 Jabbers..................................................................................................................................................D-6 D.3.5 FCSErrors.............................................................................................................................................D-7
E Alarm Management..................................................................................................................E-1
E.1 NE Alarm Management..................................................................................................................................E-2 E.2 Board Alarm Management.............................................................................................................................E-2 E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity....................................................................................................................E-2 E.2.2 Alarm Suppression................................................................................................................................E-3 E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report................................................................................................................................E-3 E.2.4 Alarm Reversion....................................................................................................................................E-3 E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold..............................................................................................E-4
F Performance Event Management............................................................................................F-1

F.1 NE Performance Event Management............................................................................................................. F-2 F.2 Board Performance Event Management......................................................................................................... F-2
G Alarm Suppression Relationship.........................................................................................G-1 H Glossary.....................................................................................................................................H-1

H.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................H-2 H.2 A-E................................................................................................................................................................H-2 H.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................H-11 H.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................H-16 H.5 P-T...............................................................................................................................................................H-22 H.6 U-Z..............................................................................................................................................................H-30
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
xi
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap...............................................................................................................1-5 Figure 1-2 Weight lifting......................................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 1-3 Schematic diagram of slanting a ladder..............................................................................................1-8 Figure 1-4 Schematic diagram of the ladder one meter higher than the eave......................................................1-8 Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch............................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 4-1 Main procedure of emergency maintenance.......................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-2 Procedure of on-site fault handling.....................................................................................................4-6 Figure 5-1 General fault locating procedures.......................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Flow of handling a service interruption..............................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling.....................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-4 Flow of handling radio link faults....................................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-5 Flow of troubleshooting the interconnection with the PDH equipment...........................................5-18 Figure 5-6 Flow of handling an Ethernet service fault.......................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-7 Flow of handling an abnormal RMON performance event..............................................................5-23 Figure 5-8 Flow of handling orderwire faults....................................................................................................5-25 Figure 7-1 CLETOP cassette cleaner...................................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-2 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area...........................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area..................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue ...............................................................................................7-6 Figure 7-5 Inloop................................................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-6 Outloop.............................................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-7 Inloop................................................................................................................................................7-18 Figure 7-8 Outloop.............................................................................................................................................7-19 Figure 7-9 Inloop................................................................................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-10 Service trail.....................................................................................................................................7-21 Figure 7-11 PRBS test in the tributary direction................................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-12 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction........................................................................................7-23
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
xiii
Tables
Tables
Table 4-1 Description of the main procedure of emergency maintenance...........................................................4-4 Table 4-2 Sheet for on-site operations..................................................................................................................4-4 Table 4-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling......................................................................................................4-7 Table 5-1 Flow description...................................................................................................................................5-4 Table 5-2 Flow description...................................................................................................................................5-6 Table 5-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling......................................................................................................5-8 Table 5-4 Causes of radio link faults..................................................................................................................5-10 Table 5-5 Flow description.................................................................................................................................5-14 Table 5-6 Flow description.................................................................................................................................5-19 Table 5-7 Flow description.................................................................................................................................5-22 Table 5-8 Flow description.................................................................................................................................5-23 Table 5-9 Flow description.................................................................................................................................5-26 Table A-1 Alarm list............................................................................................................................................A-2 Table B-1 Important abnormal events.................................................................................................................B-2 Table C-1 Microwave power performance events...............................................................................................C-2 Table C-2 FEC performance events....................................................................................................................C-3 Table C-3 Performance events regarding radio link bit errors............................................................................C-3 Table C-4 ATPC performance events..................................................................................................................C-4 Table C-5 AM performance events.....................................................................................................................C-4 Table C-6 Performance events regarding board temperature..............................................................................C-4 Table D-1 List of RMON alarm entries...............................................................................................................D-2 Table D-2 List of RMON performance entries....................................................................................................D-2 Table E-1 Setting of the bit error alarm threshold...............................................................................................E-4 Table F-1 Board performance event management function.................................................................................F-2 Table G-1 Suppression relationship between intra-board alarms........................................................................G-1 Table G-2 Suppression relationship between inter-board alarms........................................................................G-1
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
xv
1 Safety Precautions
1
1.1 General Safety Precautions
Specific Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
The general safety precautions include parts of the safety precautions. Read and follow these safety precautions before installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment. This topic also provides guidelines on how to select the appropriate measuring instruments and test devices.
Before installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment, read through the instructions and precautions carefully to minimize the possibility of accidents. The Danger, Caution, Warning, and Note items in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are only parts of the safety precautions as a whole.
Symbols
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1-1
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
Local Rules and Regulations

When operating the equipment, you must obey the local rules and regulations. The safety precautions provided in this document are supplementary and should be in compliance with the local safety regulations.
Basic Requirements for Installation

The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei equipment must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l
Only the qualified and skilled personnel are allowed to install, operate, and maintain the equipment. Only the certified professionals are allowed to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the equipment. Any replacement or change of the equipment or parts of the equipment (including the software) must be performed by the certified or authorized personnel of Huawei. Any fault or error that may cause a safety problem must be reported immediately to the person in charge.
Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the equipment that needs to be grounded.
l
When installing the equipment, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the equipment, always disconnect the grounding facilities last. Do not damage the grounding conductor. Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor. The equipment should be connected to the protection ground permanently. Before operating the equipment, check the electrical connections of the equipment, and ensure that the equipment is properly grounded.
l l l
Human Safety
l l
Do not operate the equipment and cables in the case of lightning. To avoid electric shocks, do not connect the safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to the telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. To prevent laser radiation from injuring your eyes, do not look at the optical port directly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1-2

l
Before operating the equipment, put on the electrostatic discharge (ESD) work uniforms, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap, and take off metallic articles, such as watch, bracelet, and ring, to prevent electric stock or injury of the human body. In the case of fire, keep away from the building or the area where the equipment is located and press the fire alarm system or dial the phone number for a fire call. In this case, do not enter the building which is on fire.
Equipment Safety
l
Before operation, install the equipment firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as a wall or a rack. When the system is operating, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked. When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly. After installing the equipment, clean up the packing materials.
l l l
1.2 Electrical Safety

High Voltage
DANGER
l
The high-voltage power supply provides the power for the equipment. Direct or indirect contact of high voltage and mains supply through damp objects may result in fatal danger. Non-standard and improper high-voltage operations may result in certain accidents such as fire or electric shock. The personnel who perform high-voltage operations must be certified for high-voltage and AC operations. The AC cables must be bridged and routed according to the local rules and regulations. When operating AC power supply facilities, obey the local rules and regulations. When performing high-voltage and AC operations, use special tools rather than general tools. When performing operations in a damp environment, ensure that the equipment is kept away from water. Switch off the power supply immediately if you find any water in the rack or if the rack is damp.
l l l
Thunderstorm
DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, iron tower, or backstay in stormy weather conditions.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1-3
Power Cable
CAUTION
Do not install or remove the power cable with the power on. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or injury to the eye.
l l
Before installing or removing the power cable, switch off the power supply. Before connecting the power cable, ensure that the power cable and label conform to the requirements for the installation.
Fuse
CAUTION
If the fuse on the equipment blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the equipment.
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).
l
The human body generates a static electromagnetic field in the following situations: moving of the human body, friction of the clothes, friction between shoes and the ground, and holding ordinary plastic in hand. The static electromagnetic field will remain within the human body for a long time. Before operating the equipment, parts, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.
Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.
1-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
1.3 Flammable Air Environment

DANGER
Do not place or operate the equipment in an environment where flammable gas, explosive gas, or smog exists. Operations on any electronic device in an environment where explosive gas exists may cause extreme risks.
1.4 Radiation
Electromagnetic Exposure
DANGER
Danger indicates a hazard that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Warning indicates a hazard that, if not avoided, could result in moderate or serious injury.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1-5
CAUTION
Caution indicates a hazard that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.
CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.
Forbidden Area
The following requirements should be met:
l
Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction. A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.
1.5 Working at Heights

CAUTION
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. The requirements for working at heights are as follows:
l l
The personnel who work at heights must be trained. The operating machines and tools should be carried and handled safely to prevent them from falling down. Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, should be taken. Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas. Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.
l l l
Weight Lifting
CAUTION
Do not enter the areas under the jib arm and the goods in suspension when lifting weight.
1-6
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

l l l
Ensure that the operators have completed the related training and have been certified. Check the weight lifting tools and ensure that they are intact. Lift the weight only when the weight lifting tools are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearing object or the wall. Use a concise command to prevent any incorrect operation. Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-2.
l l
Figure 1-2 Weight lifting
Using the Ladder

Checking the Ladder
l l
Before using the ladder, check and ensure that the ladder is intact. Before using the ladder, check the maximum weight that the ladder can support. Overweight on the ladder is strictly prohibited.
Placing the Ladder A slant angle of 75 degrees is recommended. The slant can be measured with the angle square or with arms, as shown in Figure 1-3. When a ladder is used, the wide part of the ladder should stand on the ground. Otherwise, take certain protective measures on the base part of the ladder to prevent against sliding. Place the ladder on a rigid ground.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-7
Figure 1-3 Schematic diagram of slanting a ladder
When climbing the ladder, note the following points:

l l
Ensure that the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder edge. To lessen the danger and ensure the safety, keep your balance on the ladder before any operation. Do not climb higher than the forth highest step of the ladder.
If you intend to climb to the top, the length of the ladder should be at least one meter higher than the eave, as shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Schematic diagram of the ladder one meter higher than the eave
1-8
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1.6 Mechanical Safety

Drilling Holes
CAUTION
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Improper drilling may cause damage to the internal cables and the EMC function of the cabinet. Metallic scraps produced by the drilling may fall into the cabinet and cause short circuits of the circuit boards.
l l
Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet. During the drilling, ensure that your eyes are protected properly. The flying metallic scraps may cause injury to your eyes. Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, wear the protection gloves. Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.
l l
Sharp Objects
CAUTION
When handling the equipment by hands, wear the protection gloves to avoid injury by sharp objects.
Fans
l
When replacing components, ensure that no objects such as components, screws, and tools fall into a fan that is running, to prevent damage to the fan or equipment. When replacing the equipment close to a fan, do not put a finger or a board into a fan that is running before the fan is switched off and stops running, to prevent injury to your hands or damage to the equipment.
Handling Heavy Objects

When handling heavy objects, wear the protection gloves to prevent injury to your hands.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1-9
CAUTION
l
When handling heavy objects, ensure that the weight bearing measures are taken to prevent you from being pressed or sprained. When taking the chassis out from the cabinet, draw attention to the equipment that is unstable or heavy on the cabinet, to prevent any pressing or smashing injury. When handling a chassis, generally, two persons rather than one person are required to handle a heavy chassis. When handling a chassis, keep your back straight and move gently to prevent you from being sprained. When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handle or bottom of the chassis rather than the handle of a module (such as a power supply module, a fan module, or a board) that has been installed inside the chassis.
1.7 Other Precautions

Removing and Inserting Boards
CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid bending pins on the backplane.
l l l
Insert the board along the guiding slot. The contact of board circuits is not allowed to avoid short circuits or scratches. Do not touch the circuit, components, connectors, or routing channels of the board to prevent damage caused by electrostatic discharge of the human body to the electrostaticsensitive components.
Binding Signal Cables
CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.
Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the external plastic coatings of the cables. The following requirements should be observed to ensure safe implementation:
l
All the cables can be routed only when the ambient temperature is higher than zero degrees.
1-10

l
If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is lower than zero degrees, you must transfer them to a place where the ambient temperature is room temperature at least 24 hours before the operation. Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.
High Temperature
WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.
IF Cables
WARNING
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1-11
2 Guides to High-Risk Operations
Guides to High-Risk Operations
About This Chapter

This topic describes the operations that easily cause human body injuries and equipment damage in the process of commissioning and maintenance. 2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch is a toggle lever switch. When you turn on or turn off the toggle lever switch, perform the operations in strict compliance with the guidelines. Otherwise, the IDU board may be damaged. 2.2 Operation Guide to IF Jumpers Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, human body injuries may be caused, and the IDU or the ODU may be damaged. 2.3 Operation Guide to IF Cables Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, human body injuries may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
2-1
2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever Switch

The ODU-PWR switch is a toggle lever switch. When you turn on or turn off the toggle lever switch, perform the operations in strict compliance with the guidelines. Otherwise, the IDU board may be damaged.
Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch

The toggle lever switch resides on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch
O:OFF
I:ON
Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch
1. 2.
2-2
Pull the toggle lever switch out slightly. Turn it to the left.
3.
Release the toggle lever switch.
Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch
1. 2. 3.
Pull the toggle lever switch out slightly. Turn it to the right. Release the toggle lever switch.
2.2 Operation Guide to IF Jumpers

Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, human body injuries may be caused, and the IDU or the ODU may be damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IDU. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever Switch.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
2-3
DANGER
Do not remove any IF jumper before the ODU is powered off! Step 2 Remove or install an IF jumper. ----End
2.3 Operation Guide to IF Cables

Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, human body injuries may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IDU. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever Switch.
2-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
1 1
DANGER
Do not remove any IF cable before the ODU is powered off! Step 2 Install or remove an IF cable. ----End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
2-5
3 Routine Maintenance
3
About This Chapter
Routine Maintenance
The aim of routine maintenance is to detect and rectify latent faults in time before the equipment becomes faulty and services are affected. 3.1 Routine Maintenance Items Routine maintenance items are classified into the routine maintenance items carried out through the network management system (NMS), field maintenance items for indoor equipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment. 3.2 Guidelines for Routine Maintenance Items This topic describes the guidelines for each routine maintenance item.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
3-1
3.1 Routine Maintenance Items

Routine maintenance items are classified into the routine maintenance items carried out through the network management system (NMS), field maintenance items for indoor equipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.
Routine Maintenance Items Carried Out Through the NMS

Maintenance Item Recomm ended Cycle Every day Every day Every week Every week Every week Every week Every week Half a year Remarks
3.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs 3.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms 3.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms 3.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events 3.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance 3.2.6 Browsing the History Performance 3.2.7 Browsing the History Transmit Power and Receive Power 3.2.8 Testing IF 1+1 Switching
Applies to only the equipment that is configured in 1+1 protection mode. During the 1+1 protection switching time (<500 ms), the protected services are interrupted. Hence, it is recommended that you perform 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light.
Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment

Maintenance Item 3.2.9 Checking the Equipment Room Recommended Cycle Every two months Remarks -
3-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment

Maintenance Item 3.2.10 Checking the ODU 3.2.11 Checking the Hybrid Coupler 3.2.12 Checking the Antenna 3.2.13 Checking the IF Cables 3.2.14 Checking the LOS Condition Recommended Cycle Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Remarks Perform a complete check after a level-8 or higher-level hurricane, an earthquake, or other exceptional circumstances.
3.2 Guidelines for Routine Maintenance Items

This topic describes the guidelines for each routine maintenance item. 3.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs By checking the NE status periodically, you can detect the abnormal statuses of one or more NEs in time. 3.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared. By browsing the current alarms periodically, you can detect and rectify faults in time. 3.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms A history alarm is an alarm that is cleared. Periodically browsing and storing the history alarm information helps in locating and rectifying faults. 3.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events An abnormal event refers to an exception that arises in the system at a particular time. By browsing the abnormal events periodically, you can find the exceptions that occur in the equipment in time. 3.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time. By browsing the current performance events periodically, you can learn about the performance change of the equipment in time. Hence, you can detect the latent hazards in time when the performance of the equipment starts to degrade. 3.2.6 Browsing the History Performance A history alarm is an alarm that is cleared. By browsing and saving the history performance events periodically, you can provide fault locating information for troubleshooting. 3.2.7 Browsing the History Transmit Power and Receive Power By browsing the history transmit power and receive power periodically, you can learn about the change trend of the transmit power and receive power, which provides a reference for troubleshooting radio links. 3.2.8 Testing IF 1+1 Switching By testing IF 1+1 switching periodically, you can check whether the equipment is normally switched over.
3.2.9 Checking the Equipment Room Periodically checking the equipment room not only ensures that the equipment can operate normally at appropriate temperature and humidity conditions, but also reduces the fault rate, and increases the service life of the equipment. 3.2.10 Checking the ODU By checking an ODU periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the ODU in time. 3.2.11 Checking the Hybrid Coupler By checking a hybrid coupler periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the hybrid coupler in time. 3.2.12 Checking the Antenna By checking an antenna periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the antenna in time. 3.2.13 Checking the IF Cables By checking the IF cables periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the IF cables in time. 3.2.14 Checking the LOS Condition By checking the LOS condition of the transmission link periodically, you can detect latent LOS faults on the transmission link in time.
3.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs

By checking the NE status periodically, you can detect the abnormal statuses of one or more NEs in time.
Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of NE monitor or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In NE List, query Communication Status of an NE. Communication Status needs to be Normal. Step 2 Check Login Status of an NE. If the Login Status column of an NE is Not Logged In, log in to the NE. 1. 2. Select an NE, and then click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Enter a user name in User Name and a password in Password.
l l
The user name is lct by default. The password for the user lct is password by default.
NOTE
The user lct has the authority at the system level.
3.
3-4
Click OK.
After you log in to the NE successfully, Login Status in NE List changes to Logged In. ----End
3.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms

A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared. By browsing the current alarms periodically, you can detect and rectify faults in time.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then click the the toolbar.
TIP
icon on
You can also click an alarm indicator on the toolbar to display the alarms of the specific severity. From left to right, the alarm indicators and corresponding alarm severities are as follows:
l l l l l
Red: critical alarm Orange: major alarm Yellow: minor alarm Purple: warning Light blue: abnormal event
The Browse Current Alarms tab is displayed by default. Step 2 Browse the displayed alarms. Step 3 If there are newly generated alarms after the last maintenance, select the newly generated alarms, record the details of these newly generated alarms, and then notify the troubleshooting personnel to clear these alarms in time. For details about how to handle an alarm, refer to A Alarm Reference. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. A text file that lists the current alarms is displayed in the IE system.
NOTE
You can save and archive the text file as required.
----End
3.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms

A history alarm is an alarm that is cleared. Periodically browsing and storing the history alarm information helps in locating and rectifying faults.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then click the the toolbar. Step 2 Click the Browse History Alarms tab. Step 3 Click Filter. The Filter dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Specify Rising Time and Cleared Time, and then click Filter. The time span starts from the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 5 Browse the filtered history alarms. Step 6 Click Save As. A text file that lists the history alarms is displayed in the IE system.
NOTE
icon on
----End
3.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events

An abnormal event refers to an exception that arises in the system at a particular time. By browsing the abnormal events periodically, you can find the exceptions that occur in the equipment in time.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Alarm > Browse Abnormal Events from the Function Tree.
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

TIP
In the NE Explorer, you can also select the required NE from the Object Tree and click the navigate to the Browse Abnormal Events tab.
icon to
Step 2 Click Filter. The Filter dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Abnormal Event combo box, select Select All, and then click OK. Step 4 Browse the displayed abnormal events. For details on how to handle an abnormal event, see B Abnormal Event Reference. Step 5 Optional: Click Save As. A text file that lists the abnormal events is displayed in the IE system.
NOTE
----End
Related Information
An abnormal event refers to an exception that arises in the system at a particular time rather than persists for a period. Being different from alarms, an abnormal event has the occurrence time rather than the clearance time.
3.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance

The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time. By browsing the current performance events periodically, you can learn about the performance change of the equipment in time. Hence, you can detect the latent hazards in time when the performance of the equipment starts to degrade.
Prerequisite
l
The performance monitoring function of the NE must be enabled. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function, see 7.9 Configuring Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. The NE user must have the authority of NE monitor or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board, and then choose Performance > Current Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 3 Select 15-Minute next to Monitor Period.
Step 4 Select all the available performance events in Count, and select Consecutive Severely Errored Second in Display Options. Step 5 Click Query. Step 6 Browse the displayed performance events. In normal cases, no bit error performance events are displayed, and the number of pointer justification events is less than six per day on each port. Step 7 Select all the available performance events in Gauge, and select Current Value and Maximum/ Minimum Value in Display Options. Step 8 Click Query. Step 9 Browse the displayed performance events. Compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as board temperature, do not change drastically. Step 10 Select 24-Hour next to Monitor Period. Step 11 Repeat Step 4 to Step 9 to query the current performance events in a period of 24 hours. ----End
3.2.6 Browsing the History Performance

A history alarm is an alarm that is cleared. By browsing and saving the history performance events periodically, you can provide fault locating information for troubleshooting.
Prerequisite
l

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the requried board, and then choose Performance > History Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 3 Select 15-Minute next to Monitor Period. Step 4 Specify the start time and the end time of a specific time span. The time span starts from the time when the last history performance event browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 5 Select all the available performance events in Count. Step 6 Click Query to browse the history performance events.
Step 7 Click Save As. A text file that lists the history performance events is displayed in the IE system.
NOTE
Step 8 Select all the available performance events in Gauge, and select Current Value and Maximum/ Minimum Value in Display Options. Step 9 Click Query to browse the history performance events. Step 10 Click Save As. A text file that lists the history performance events is displayed in the IE system.
NOTE
Step 11 Select 24-Hour next to Monitor Period. Step 12 Repeat Step 4 to Step 10 to query the history performance events in a period of 24 hours. Step 13 Select 24-Hour next to Monitor Period. ----End
3.2.7 Browsing the History Transmit Power and Receive Power

By browsing the history transmit power and receive power periodically, you can learn about the change trend of the transmit power and receive power, which provides a reference for troubleshooting radio links.
Prerequisite
l

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required ODU for the history transmit power and receive power, and then choose Configuration > Performance Graph Analyse from the Function Tree. Step 2 Specify the start time and end time of a time span. The time span starts from the last routing maintenance time to the current time. Step 3 Set CounterType to 15M. Step 4 Click Drawing. The history transmit and receive power curve of the ODU in the specified time span is displayed.
Step 5 Analyze the power curve. If the receive power fading of two adjacent points exceeds 20 dB, but the weather does not change, contact the troubleshooting engineers. ----End
3.2.8 Testing IF 1+1 Switching

By testing IF 1+1 switching periodically, you can check whether the equipment is normally switched over.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Precautions
l
This task carries out IF 1+1 switching in manual switching mode, which is used for equipment switching (that is, HSB switching). During the 1+1 protection switching time (< 500 ms), the protected services are interrupted. Hence, it is recommended that you perform IF 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light. Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment works properly. If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Step 3 In Protection Group, select the protection group for IF 1+1 switching. Step 4 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click an IF board and choose Manual Switch to from the shortcut menu. Step 5 Click OK to start the protection switching. Step 6 Click Query to check the protection switching status. After the switching is completed, Switching Status of Device in Protection Group changes to Manual Switching, and the current board functions as the standby board. Step 7 After the equipment works for a period of time, query the current alarms and performance events of the service. There should be no new alarms or bit error performance events. Step 8 Repeat Step 1 to Step 3. Step 9 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click an IF board and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Step 10 Click OK to restore the protection switching. Step 11 Click Query to check the protection switching status.
After the switching is completed, Switching Status of Device in Protection Group changes to Automatic Switching. Step 12 After the equipment runs properly for a period of time, query the current alarms and performance events. There should be no new alarms or performance events. ----End
3.2.9 Checking the Equipment Room

Periodically checking the equipment room not only ensures that the equipment can operate normally at appropriate temperature and humidity conditions, but also reduces the fault rate, and increases the service life of the equipment.
Prerequisite
None.

None.
Procedure
Step 1 Record the reading of the thermometer in the equipment room. The normal temperature ranges from -5C to +50C Step 2 Record the reading of the humidity meter in the equipment room. The normal humidity ranges from 5% to 95%. Step 3 Check whether the equipment room meets the disaster protection requirements. Ensure the following points:
l
Certain portable foam fire extinguishers are available in the equipment room and these extinguishers need to be within their service life. No rain leakage or water penetration is found in the equipment room. No mice or insects are found in the equipment room.
l l
Step 4 Clean the equipment room. Ensure that the cabinets, equipment shelves, equipment, desks, and floors are clean. The equipment needs to be tidy. ----End
3.2.10 Checking the ODU

By checking an ODU periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the ODU in time.
Prerequisite
None.

None.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the ODU is located within the protected area of a lightning arrester. In the case of plain areas, a lightning arrester protects an area that is located within an angle of 45 under the lightning arrester. In the case of mountainous areas and the areas where lightning frequently occurs, a lightning arrester protects an area that is located within an angle of 30 under the lightning arrester. Step 2 Ensure that the ODU is fixed properly on the antenna. Step 3 Ensure that the ODU is not damaged. Step 4 Ensure that the interface between the ODU and the antenna is waterproof. Step 5 Ensure that the protection grounding cable of the ODU is grounded firmly and reliably. ----End
3.2.11 Checking the Hybrid Coupler

By checking a hybrid coupler periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the hybrid coupler in time.
Prerequisite
None.

None.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the hybrid coupler is located within the protected area of the lightning arrester. In the case of plain areas, a lightning arrester protects an area that is located within an angle of 45 under the lightning arrester. In the case of mountainous areas and the areas where lightning frequently occurs, a lightning arrester protects the area that is located within an angle of 30 under the lightning arrester. Step 2 Ensure that the coupler is fixed reliably on the antenna. Step 3 Ensure that the coupler is not damaged. Step 4 Ensure that the interface between the coupler and the antenna is waterproof. Step 5 Ensure that the interface between the coupler and the ODU is waterproof. ----End
3.2.12 Checking the Antenna

By checking an antenna periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the antenna in time.
Prerequisite
None.

None.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the antenna is located within the protected area of the lightning arrester. In the case of plain areas, a lightning arrester protects an area that is located within an angle of 45 under lightning arrester. In the case of mountainous areas and the areas where lightning frequently occurs, a lightning arrester protects an area that is located within an angle of 30 under the lightning arrester. Step 2 Ensure that the antenna is fixed reliably on the mast. Step 3 Ensure that the antenna radome is not damaged. Step 4 Ensure that there is no accumulated water in the antenna. Step 5 Check whether the fastening bolts on the antenna are loose. Check whether the antenna slants from the original position. Ensure that the azimuth angle and the elevation angle of the antenna meet the design requirements. Step 6 In the case of split mounting, ensure that the installation parts (ODU adapter, antenna adapter, and flexible waveguide) are installed firmly, and that the connectors are fastened. Step 7 Check and ensure that the interface of the feed boom is properly sealed and waterproof. ----End
3.2.13 Checking the IF Cables

By checking the IF cables periodically, you can detect faults and latent hazards of the IF cables in time.
Prerequisite
None.

None.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the cables.
l l l l
No cables are bent or twisted. No bare copper wires are found. The bending radius of a cable needs to greater than 30 cm. The IF cables are bound in accordance with IF Cable Routing and Binding Specifications specified in the Installation Reference. The feeder clip or binding strap is not loosen.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-13
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Step 2 Check the cable connectors.

l l
The cable connector needs to be connected reliably to the ODU. The cable connector needs to be waterproof.
Step 3 Check the grounding of the cables.

l l
The grounding clip needs to be waterproof. The grounding cable needs to be routed from top downwards. The angle between the grounding cable and an IF cable needs to be not more than 15 degrees.
----End
3.2.14 Checking the LOS Condition

By checking the LOS condition of the transmission link periodically, you can detect latent LOS faults on the transmission link in time.
Prerequisite
None.

Telescope
Procedure
Step 1 Use the telescope to search for the antenna at the opposite end from a location nearby the local antenna. No buildings or maintains exist on the transmission link, which may block the LOS. Step 2 Check whether the spanning tree in the transmission path is blocked. Step 3 Check whether any new buildings exist in the transmission path. ----End
3-14
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
4 Emergency Maintenance
4
About This Chapter
Emergency Maintenance
Emergency maintenance is performed when emergencies occur or possible emergencies owing to natural factors may occur during the operation of the equipment. 4.1 Definition of Emergency In the case of the microwave equipment, an emergency situation is where the microwave services are interrupted. 4.2 Purposes of Emergence Maintenance Emergency maintenance is performed to restore the normal operation of a system or a device rapidly. This is different from troubleshooting, which helps to locate and rectify the faults. 4.3 Procedure of Emergency Maintenance The procedure of emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure that handles faults on site.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
4-1
4.1 Definition of Emergency

In the case of the microwave equipment, an emergency situation is where the microwave services are interrupted.
4.2 Purposes of Emergence Maintenance

Emergency maintenance is performed to restore the normal operation of a system or a device rapidly. This is different from troubleshooting, which helps to locate and rectify the faults.
4.3 Procedure of Emergency Maintenance

The procedure of emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure that handles faults on site.
NOTE
In the case of emergency events, the customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
4-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Main Procedure of Emergency Maintenance

Figure 4-1 Main procedure of emergency maintenance
Start
Is there an incorrect operation? No
Yes
Cancel the operation
Is there any backup transmission resource? No
Yes
Switch the service to the backup resource
Is the power down
Yes
Contact the power supply engineer
No
Is the service configured with protection

No
Yes
Troubleshoot the switching failure
Is there any alarm on the NE? No Is the Ethernet service interrupted No
Yes
3 Clear the alarm
Yes
Troubleshoot the Ethernet service fault
Is the interconnection faulty?

No
Yes
Troubleshoot the interconnection fault
Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section
Proceed to the next No step
Is the service restored?
5 Is the service restored? Yes 6 Check the troubleshooting result No Contact Huawei engineers
Yes
End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
4-3
Table 4-1 Description of the main procedure of emergency maintenance Comment No. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows:
l l l l l
Modifying the data configurations Performing loopback operations Muting the ODU Changing cables Loading software
Check the notice issued by associated departments, and check whether there are any external factors that may cause service faults, such as faults in the power supply, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switching devices). See 7.3.1 Checking the NE Status and 7.3.3 Browsing the Current Alarms. The following alarms can be cleared through the NM:DBMS_ERROR, LOOP_ALM, MSSW_DIFFERENT, NESF_LOST, NESTATE_INSTALL, andRADIO_MUTE. In the case of emergency events, the customers in China can contact our 24hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. After the fault is handled, proceed as follows: 1. Check the alarms, and ensure that the system is running smoothly. 2. Arrange personnel to watch and guard the system during the peak service hours, and be sure to solve the problems promptly, if any. 3. Fill in the sheet for on-site operations, record the fault symptoms and handling results, and then send them to Huawei. Table 4-2 shows the sheet for on-site operations.
3 4
Table 4-2 Sheet for on-site operations Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Whole Procedure maintained by Handling Result Remarks
4-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Procedure of On-Site Fault Handling
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
4-5
Figure 4-2 Procedure of on-site fault handling

Start
Obvious equipment damage? No
Yes
Repair or replace the equipment
Is the PWR No indicator on the IDU on? Yes 2 Browse alarms locally by using the Web LCT 3 Yes Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 R_LOS /R_LOF/R_LOC alarm? No 6 Tributary alarm? No PDH interconnection alarm? No Ethernet service fault? No Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Troubleshoot the power input
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Service restored? Yes End
4-6
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Table 4-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling Comment No. 1 Description The handling procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the air circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the air circuit breaker is automatically turned off, identify the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and handle the fault accordingly. 2. Check the power cables, especially the power connectors, and replace the power cables or re-make power connectors if required. 3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact the power engineers and handle the fault.
NOTE For detailed specifications of the fuse capacity and input power, refer to the topic of "Powering On the Equipment" in the Commissioning Guide.
The handling procedure is as follows: 1. Refer to the Commissioning Guide and Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. 2. Refer to the Configuration Guide and Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. 3. Refer to Commissioning Guide, and Checking Alarms.
NOTE If you fail to log in to a created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct, and then identify and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the IDU. For details about the indicators, refer to the IDU Hardware Description.
Pay special attention to the following alarms:

l l l l l l l l l l l l
HARD_BAD POWER_ALM BD_STATUS NESF_LOST TEMP_ALARM RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW IF_INPWR_ABN IF_CABLE_OPEN VOLT_LOS

l l l
MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_BER_EXC

4-7
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Comment No. 5 6
Description The R_LOS, R_LOF, and R_LOC alarms indicate that the microwave frames received by the IF unit are abnormal. Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l l
T_ALOS E1_LOC
See 5.4 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment.
4-8
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
5
About This Chapter
Troubleshooting
This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedures for the OptiX RTN 605 and provides troubleshooting methods for common faults. 5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomenon. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruption The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault. 5.3 Troubleshooting Radio Links When an NE reports MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance degradation of a radio link, there is a radio link fault. 5.4 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment In the case that the OptiX RTN equipment is interconnected with the PDH equipment, if the PDH service cannot be transmitted between the equipment sets, there is an interconnection fault. 5.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults Ethernet services can be transmitted over Hybrid radio or Mini IP radio. An Ethernet service fault may refer to Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration. 5.6 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-1
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure

When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomenon. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
5-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Figure 5-1 General fault locating procedures

Start 1 Record the fault phenomenon
Caused by external factors? No
Yes
Other handling procedures
Analyze fault causes and locate the fault
Is the fault cleared? 4 No Report to Huawei
Yes
Make a solution together
Attempt to clear the fault
No
Is the service restored? Yes Observe the operating
No
Is the fault cleared? Yes Fill in the fault handling report
End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-3
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-1 Flow description Note 1 Description When recording the fault phenomenon, make a true and detailed record of the entire process of the fault. Record the exact time when the fault occurs, and the operations performed before and after the fault occurs. Save the alarms, performance events, and other important information. Check the notice issued by associated departments, and check whether there are any external factors that may cause service faults, such as faults in the power supply, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switching devices). If the fault is caused by the equipment, refer to 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruption. The customers in China can contact our 24hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruption

The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault.
Fault Causes
l
The operation is improper. If the configuration data changes, the loopback occurs, or the cable is replaced, the services may be interrupted.
l l
The transmission NE or link is faulty. The interconnection is improper. If the transmission equipment functions properly and the connection is proper, check whether the interconnection between the transmission equipment is proper and whether the switching equipment is faulty.
Fault Locating Methods

1. Check whether an abnormal operation causes the service interruption by performing a loopback on the previous operations.
5-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
2. 3.
Query alarms on the centralized NMS or the NMS on the site, and then locate the fault based on the alarm analysis. If the fault cannot be located through the alarm analysis method, locate the fault by loopback section by section and part replacement.
CAUTION
If the fault cannot be rectified immediately, focus on the service recovery. You can recover the services by adjusting the service route or performing forced switching as soon as possible.
Fault Locating Procedure

Figure 5-2 Flow of handling a service interruption
Start
1 Maloperation
Yes
No 2 Service interrupted by external causes? No Yes Contact related departments to handle the problem
Query NE status and alarm by using the NMS
4 NE access successful and alarm cleared? No Rectify the fault on site Go to the next step No Service restored? Yes End Yes Handle the alarm
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-5
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Flow description Note 1 Description The common abnormal operations are as follows:
l l l l l
Modifying the data configuration Loopback Muting the ODU Replacing the cable. Loading the software
Check the notice issued by associated departments, and check whether there are any external factors that may cause service faults, such as faults in the power supply, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switching devices). See 3.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs and 3.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms. The alarms that can be cleared through the operations on the NMS are as follows: DBMS_ERROR, LOOP_ALM, MSSW_DIFFERENT, NESF_LOST, NESTATE_INSTALL, and RADIO_MUTE.
3 4
5-6
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Figure 5-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling

Start
Obvious equipment damage? No
Yes
Repair or replace the equipment
Is the PWR No indicator on the IDU on? Yes 2 Browse alarms locally by using the Web LCT 3 Yes Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 R_LOS /R_LOF/R_LOC alarm? No 6 Tributary alarm? No PDH interconnection alarm? No Ethernet service fault? No Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Troubleshoot the power input
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Clear the alarm
Service restored? Yes End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-7
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling Comment No. 1 Description The handling procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the air circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the air circuit breaker is automatically turned off, identify the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and handle the fault accordingly. 2. Check the power cables, especially the power connectors, and replace the power cables or re-make power connectors if required. 3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact the power engineers and handle the fault.
NOTE For detailed specifications of the fuse capacity and input power, refer to the topic of "Powering On the Equipment" in the Commissioning Guide.
The handling procedure is as follows: 1. Refer to the Commissioning Guide and Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. 2. Refer to the Configuration Guide and Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. 3. Refer to Commissioning Guide, and Checking Alarms.
NOTE If you fail to log in to a created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct, and then identify and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the IDU. For details about the indicators, refer to the IDU Hardware Description.

l l l l l l l l l l l l
HARD_BAD POWER_ALM BD_STATUS NESF_LOST TEMP_ALARM RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW IF_INPWR_ABN IF_CABLE_OPEN VOLT_LOS

l l l
MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_BER_EXC

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-8
5 Troubleshooting
Comment No. 5 6
Description The R_LOS, R_LOF, and R_LOC alarms indicate that the microwave frames received by the IF unit are abnormal. Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l l
T_ALOS E1_LOC
See 5.4 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment.
Experience and Summary

The maintenance personnel need to perform the regular maintenance to reduce the equipment faulty rate. Thus, equipment faults can be discovered and rectified before they affect the services.
5.3 Troubleshooting Radio Links

When an NE reports MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance degradation of a radio link, there is a radio link fault. The key to locating a radio link fault is to check whether the transmit power and the receive power are abnormal, and to check whether there is an external interference. In the following two cases, the transmit power is abnormal. The first case is that the transmit power exceeds the range that the ODU supports. The second case is that the difference between the transmit power and the set value is more than 2 dB when the ATPC is disabled. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows:
l l l l l l
RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW TSL_CUR TSL_MAX TSL_MIN TSL_AVG

NOTE
For a detailed description of the range of the transmit power, refer to the Product Description.
In the following two cases, the RSL is abnormal. The first case is that the receive power is lower than the normal value (Normal value = Planned value - 3 dB). The second case is that the receive power is lower than the receiver sensitivity or higher than the free space receive power due to fading. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows:
l l l
RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RSL_CUR

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
l l l
RSL_MAX RSL_MIN RSL_AVG

NOTE
For a detailed description of the receiver sensitivity, refer to the Product Description.
Generally, external interference is classified into co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference.
l
Co-channel interference is crosstalk from two different radio transmitters reusing the same frequency channel. Therefore, the entire spectrum may be impaired. Adjacent channel interference is signal impairment to one frequency due to presence of another signal on a nearby frequency. Therefore, a part of the spectrum is impaired.
Because interference is closely related to the frequency in use, the transmission over a radio link may be faulty in one direction only.
Fault Causes
Table 5-4 Causes of radio link faults Fault The transmit power is abnormal. The receive power is always lower than the normal value. Common Fault Causes The ODU is faulty.
l
The antenna direction is not properly adjusted. The antennas have different polarization directions. There is a mountain or building in the transmit direction. The antenna is faulty or the connection between the antenna and the ODU is abnormal (for example, the waveguide interface of the ODU is wet or the flexible waveguide is not connected properly). The ODU is faulty.
The receive power is abnormal due to slow up-fading. The receive power is abnormal due to slow down-fading. The receive power is abnormal due to fast fading. The receive power is normal, but the radio link is faulty in one direction.
There is an external interference. The fading margin is not sufficient. The multipath fading is fast. There is external interference.
5-10
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

NOTE
5 Troubleshooting
Depending on the received level, there is up fading and down fading.

l
Up fading The received level is higher than the value after free space fading. The difference can be 10-odd decibels. Down fading The received level is lower than the value after free space fading. The difference can be tens of decibels.
Depending on the fading time, there is fast fading and slow fading.
l
Fast fading The fading duration time ranges from several milliseconds to tens of seconds. Slow fading The fading duration time ranges from tens of seconds to several hours.
Because slow down fading and fast fading are imposed by the propagation paths, the radio link may be faulty in both directions.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check whether the ODU is mute, powered off, or looped back. Check whether the data configuration is correct. Check whether the ODU and the IF board are faulty. If the transmit power is abnormal, replace the ODU. If the receive power is abnormal, check out the possible causes based on the fading type. If the receive power is normal but faults occur on the radio link intermittently, check whether there is interference before you proceed. If the transmit/receive power is normal, perform loopback operations.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 605 is the integrated equipment. An IF board is a logical board for the OptiX RTN 605. In fact, replacing the IF board is equivalent to replacing the OptiX RTN 605 in this topic.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-11
5 Troubleshooting
Fault Locating Procedures
5-12
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Figure 5-4 Flow of handling radio link faults

Start
Incorrect operation? No
Yes
ODU or IF related alarm? No
Yes Clear the alarm
No Transmit power normal? Ye s
3 Rectify the fault
RSL always lower than the normal value?

No Slow up fading causes abnormal RSL? No
Yes
4 Rectify the fault
Yes
5 Rectify the fault
Slow down fading causes abnormal RSL?

No
Yes
6 Rectify the fault
Fast fading causes abnormal RSL?

No
Yes
7 Rectify the fault
Radio link faulty in one direction?

No 9 Perform loopback operations
Yes
8 Rectify the fault
Proceed to the next step
No
Is the fault rectified? Yes End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-13
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-5 Flow description Note 1 Handle incorrect operations. Description Check the following points:
l l l l
Check whether the ODU is powered off. Check whether the ODU is muted. Check whether the IF board is looped back. Check whether the data configuration at the transmit end is the same as the data configuration at the receive end. Check whether the data configuration matches the type of the ODU and the hybrid coupler.
2 Handle equipment faults.
Pay special attention to:

l l l l l l l l l l
VOLT_LOS CONFIG_NOSUPPORT HARD_BAD TEMP_ALARM IF_INPWR_ABN RADIO_MUTE RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RADIO_RSL_HIGH IF_CABLE_OPEN
3 Handle the exception of transmit power.
6.2 Replacing an ODU
5-14
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Note 4 Handle the exception that the receive power is smaller than the normal value.
Description Follow the steps below: 1. If the receive power decreases sharply and does not recover, check the installation of the antenna. Ensure that the azimuth angle of the antenna meets the requirement. Check whether the antenna is aligned properly. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction is not aligned properly, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 2. If the difference between the receive power of the main ODU and standby ODU at one end of the 1+1 HSB radio link is beyond the range from 0 dB to 9 dB (in the case of an unbalanced hybrid coupler) or beyond the range from 0 dB to 5 dB (in the case of a balanced hybrid coupler), perform 1+1 HSB switching or replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to identify the faulty part. 3. If the difference between the RSL at the receive end and transmit end is larger than 10 dB, replace the ODUs to check whether the main or standby ODU is faulty. 4. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Rectify the wrong polarization direction. 5. Replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to identify the faulty part. 6. Check whether there is a mountain or building in the transmit direction. 7. Check whether the gains of the antennas at the receive and transmit ends comply with the specifications. Replace the antenna whose gain does not comply with the specifications.
5 Handle the up slow fading fault.
Follow the steps below: 1. Check whether there is co-channel interference. 1. Mute the opposite ODU. 2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, you can infer that there is co-channel interference that may impair the long-term availability and performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to reduce the interference.
6 Handle the down slow fading fault.
Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:

l l l l
Increase the installation height of the antenna. Reduce the transmission distance. Increase the antenna gain. Increase the transmit power.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-15
5 Troubleshooting
Note 7 Handle the fast fading fault.
Description Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:
l
Adjust the position of the antenna to block the reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, thus reducing the multipath fading. Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. For the links in the 1+1 SD configuration, adjust the height difference between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna much stronger than that of another. Increase the fading margin, by replacing the original antennas with antennas of a larger diameter or increasing the transmit power of the original antennas.
l l
8 Handle the interference fault.
The handling procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether there is co-channel interference. 1. Mute the opposite ODU. 2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, you can infer that there is co-channel interference that may impair the long-term availability and performance of the system. 2. Check whether there is adjacent channel interference. 1. Mute the opposite ODU. 2. Adjust the RF working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. 3. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. 4. Test and record the RSL. 5. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. 6. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range. 3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 4. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to reduce the interference.
5-16
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Note 9 Use the loopback method to locate a fault.
Description Follow the steps below: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port. If the fault is not cleared after the loopback, replace the IDU. 2. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken or pressed. Make the connector again. 3. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. If yes, replace the IF board. 4. Replace the ODU. If the fault is cleared after the replacement, the original ODU is faulty.

l
During a commissioning process, make sure that the antenna direction is correctly adjusted to prevent possible incipient faults. Periodically collect the change data of the transmit power and receive power, and analyze the change data to remove incipient faults in time.
5.4 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment

In the case that the OptiX RTN equipment is interconnected with the PDH equipment, if the PDH service cannot be transmitted between the equipment sets, there is an interconnection fault.
Fault Causes
l l l l
There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces. The equipment is not properly grounded. The cable performance degrades. The indexes of PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.

Analyze the fault phenomenon and alarms. Check the possible fault causes one by one.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-17
5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-5 Flow of troubleshooting the interconnection with the PDH equipment
Start 1 Check the impedance of the interfaces
Is there an Yes impedance mismatch? No Is the cable the coaxial cable? 3 No Check the cables Yes
Modify the interface impedance of the tributary board 2 Check the grounding
Is in good conditions?
No
Adjust the cables
Yes Test the indexes of interfaces
Do the interfaces meet standards? Yes
No
Handle the faults of the interconnected equipment Go to the next step No Is the fault cleared? Yes Handle the faults of the local equipment End
5-18
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-6 Flow description Note 1 2 Description Check whether 7.10 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel matches the type of the cable. Check the following points:
l
Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are jointly grounded. Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the DDF is connected to the protection ground. Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same way.
NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment. Also measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite equipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused by the grounding.
Check the following points:

l l l
Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected. Check whether the cable is broken or pressed. Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example, when the trunk cable is bound with the power cable, the cable signal is interfered by the power signal).
NOTE Checking the cables involves checking the cables from the DDF to the client side and checking the cables from the DDF to the transmission equipment side.
Check the following indexes:

l l l l
Input jitter tolerance Permitted input frequency deviation Output jitter Output frequency deviation

Grounding problems are the most common reasons that cause an interconnection failure when the OptiX RTN 600 is interconnected with the PDH equipment.
5.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults

Ethernet services can be transmitted over Hybrid radio or Mini IP radio. An Ethernet service fault may refer to Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration. The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service degradation indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example,
5 Troubleshooting
the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data.
Fault Causes
l
The human factors are as follows:

An Ethernet port loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs. The settings of the parameters of an Ethernet port, such as the port enabling, working mode, and flow control are different from those of the interconnected equipment. The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping or LCAS protocol is different from that of the remote equipment. The VCTRUNK-bound timeslot is different from that of the remote equipment. The service configuration is incorrect.
l l l
The local equipment is faulty. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. The modulation mode changes because of the degradation of the link performance when the AM function is enabled. The interconnected equipment is faulty. The network cable is faulty. The external electromagnetic interference is severe.
l l l

1. 2. 3. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarm. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance event and alarm.
5-20
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Fault Locating Procedure

Figure 5-6 Flow of handling an Ethernet service fault
Start
Incorrect operation? No
Yes
Equipment alarm or line alarm?

No
Yes
Clear the alarm
Ethernet service alarm? No
Yes
Clear the alarm
Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes
Loop formed by the Yes E-LAN service trails?
Release the loop
Abnormal RMON Yes performance events? No
Rectify the fault according to the flow of handling abnormal RMON performance events
Fault on the opposite equipment?

No
Yes
Troubleshoot the opposite equipment
Troubleshoot the equipment by performing loopback operations section by section by replacing boards
Proceed to the next step
No
Is the fault rectified? Yes End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-21
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-7 Flow description Note 1 Description Check the following points:
l l l
Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line Whether the settings of the parameters of an Ethernet port, such as the port enabling, working mode, and flow control are the same as those of the interconnected equipment Whether the configuration of the encapsulation/mapping or LCAS protocol is the same as that of the remote equipment Whether the VCTRUNK-bound timeslot is the same as that of the remote equipment Whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct.
Check the following equipment alarms:

l l l l l l l l l l
POWER_ALM HARD_BAD BD_STATUS NESF_LOST TEMP_ALARM RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW IF_INPWR_ABN MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_RDI MW_FEC_UNCOR
Check the following line alarms:

l l l l l l l l
Check the following alarms: ETH_LOS
For RMON performance events, refer to the D RMON Event Reference.
5-22
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5 Troubleshooting
Figure 5-7 Flow of handling an abnormal RMON performance event

Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port
Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Is there any PAUSE frame? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No
Yes
Rectify the fault of line bit errors
Yes
Check the working mode of the port
4 Yes Handle the flow control problem or increase the bandwidth 5
Yes
Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets
Use a meter to perform the test
Is the test passed? No 6 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board
Yes
Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment
Yes
Modify the MTU value
Proceed with the next step
No
Is the fault rectified? Yes
End
Table 5-8 Flow description Note 1 Description View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port to understand the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-23
5 Troubleshooting
Note 2
Description The handling procedure is as follows:

l
Check the network cable. If the network cable does not meet the requirements, replace the network cable. Change the Ethernet port of the access service. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the hardware of the Ethernet port on the opposite equipment is faulty.

l
Whether the port operating rate of the equipment is the same as that of the interconnected equipment Whether the full-duplex/half-duplex mode of a port on the equipment is the same as that on the interconnected equipment Do not set the auto-negotiation at one end and the full-duplex at the other end.

l
Whether the flow control mode of the equipment is the same as that of the interconnected equipment Whether the Ethernet service volume is greater than the configured VCTRUNK bandwidth
Find out of the reason of excessive broadcast packets (such as 7.5.3 Setting Loopback for the Ethernet Port of the RTN 605 1F/2F or improper VB filter table setting) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused by the opposite equipment, set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

Understand the features, working mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment, which is required to troubleshoot Ethernet faults.
5.6 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults

If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.
Fault Causes
l l l
The phone set is incorrectly set. The phone line is connected incorrectly. The orderwire is incorrectly configured.
5-24
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

NOTE
5 Troubleshooting
When services are transmitted over E1 lines, the orderwire traffic needs to be transmitted in other means, for example, through the synchronous data interface or external clock interface.
l
The IDU is faulty.

l
Check whether the phone set is correctly set, whether the phone line is correctly connected, and whether the orderwire is correctly configured. Replace the possibly faulty IDU to locate the fault.

Figure 5-8 Flow of handling orderwire faults
Start 1 Check the phone setting
Is the phone correctly set? Yes Is the phone line correctly connected? Yes 2 Check the orderwire configuration
No
Modify the phone setting
No
Re-connect the phone line
Is the configuration correct? Yes 3 Replace the possibly faulty board
No
Modify the configuration
Go to the next step
No
Is the fault cleared? Yes
End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
5-25
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-9 Flow description Note 1 Description Check the following points:
l
Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to "ON". Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T", that is, the dual tone multi-frequency mode. An orderwire phone set should be on-hook when it is not in communication, and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of the orderwire phone set should be off. If the red indicator is on, it indicates that the phone set is in the off-hook state. Press the "TALK" button in front of phone set to hook it up. In certain occasions the "TALK" button is pressed by the maintenance personnel due to carelessness. This makes the phone set stay in the off-hook state all the time and the orderwire call from other NEs cannot get through.

l
Check whether all orderwire phone numbers in a subnet are of the same length. Check whether all orderwire phone numbers in a subnet are unique.
Replace the IDU to locate the fault.

It is necessary to periodically check the orderwire phone set.
5-26
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
6 Part Replacement
6
About This Chapter
Part Replacement
Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation varies with the part types. 6.1 Replacing the IDU During the replacement of the IDU 605, the service carried by the IDU 605 is interrupted. 6.2 Replacing an ODU If the radio link provided by an ODU is not configured with protection and the services on the ODU are not configured with protection, replacing the ODU interrupts the services. In addition, the services on the radio link of the other polarization direction are affected if the radio link provided by the ODU is configured with XPIC. 6.3 Replacing the IF Cable The IF cable cannot transmit radio services when it is replaced.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
6-1
6 Part Replacement
6.1 Replacing the IDU

During the replacement of the IDU 605, the service carried by the IDU 605 is interrupted.
Prerequisite
l l l
The influence of replacing the IDU must be acknowledged. The location of the IDU to be replaced must be specified. Spare IDUs must be available on site, and the spare parts must be the same as those to be replaced in version and type.

l l l
Screwdriver ESD wrist strap Web LCT
Context
OptiX RTN 605 1D can be a substitute for OptiX RTN 605 1A/1B, and OptiX RTN 605 2D can be a substitute for OptiX RTN 605 2B. After replacement, the IDU configuration needs to be changed.
Procedure
Step 1 Use the Web LCT to query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 If the OptiX RTN 605 2D/2E/2F is used, be sure to set the ODU-S and ODU-M switches on the front panel of the IDU to "0". Step 3 Set the POWER switch on the front panel of the IDU to "0". Step 4 Turn off the air circuit breaker for the input power of the IDU. Step 5 Mark and remove all the cables connected to the IDU. Step 6 Remove the IDU from the cabinet, wall, or desk-mounted rack. Step 7 Refer to Installation Guide and install the spare IDUs. Step 8 Re-connect the cables of the IDU as marked earlier. Step 9 Refer to Commissioning Guide and power on the equipment. Step 10 Query the current alarms by using the Web LCT. There should be no new alarms. ----End
6.2 Replacing an ODU

If the radio link provided by an ODU is not configured with protection and the services on the ODU are not configured with protection, replacing the ODU interrupts the services. In addition,
6 Part Replacement
the services on the radio link of the other polarization direction are affected if the radio link provided by the ODU is configured with XPIC.
Prerequisite
l l
You must be aware of the impact of ODU replacement. You must know the specific positions of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board connected to the ODU. The spare ODU must be available and the type must be the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced.

l l l l
Torque wrench Web LCT Silicon Waterproof adhesive tape
Notes
Before you replace an ODU that is installed on the coupler, power off the ODU to be replaced, but do not power off or mute the other ODU. Otherwise, the services may be affected. The interface of the coupler generates little RF radiation, thus meeting the safety standards for electromagnetic radiation.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms on the ODU. Step 2 Turn off the ODU switch on the OptiX RTN 605 panel. Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable connected to the ODU. Step 4 Remove the ODU. If... You need to remove the OptiX RTN 600 ODU with a waveguide interface You need to remove the OptiX RTN 600 ODU with a coaxial interface You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU with a coaxial interface Then... Loosen the four latches of the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter. Remove the ODU from the post. Loosen the four M6 captive screws of the ODU cornerwise, Remove the ODU.
Step 5 Ensure that the type of the spare ODU is the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced. Step 6 Install the ODU.
6 Part Replacement
If... You need to install a new OptiX RTN 600 ODU with a waveguide interface You need to install a new OptiX RTN 600 ODU with a coaxial interface You need to install a new RTN XMC ODU with a coaxial interface
Then... See the OptiX RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide to install the ODU. See the OptiX RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide to install the ODU. See the RTN XMC ODU Quick Installation Guide to install the ODU.
Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the ODU. Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the ODU. Step 9 Turn on the ODU switch on the OptiX RTN 605 panel. Step 10 After the ODU starts to work, observe the ODU indicator on the IDU 605 panel. The ODU indicator should be on and green. Step 11 Query the current alarms of the ODU. There should be no new alarms. ----End
6.3 Replacing the IF Cable

The IF cable cannot transmit radio services when it is replaced.
Prerequisite
l l
You must be aware of the impact of IF cable replacement. You must know the specific positions of the IF cable to be replaced and the IF board connected to the IF jump. In the case of the RG-8U IF cable or the 1/2-inch IF cable, an IF jumper is required to connect the IF cable to the IDU and both ends of the IF cable should be terminated with type-N connectors. In the case of the 5D IF cable, the IF cable is connected directly to the IDU and the cable end connecting to the IDU should be terminated with the TNC connector and the cable end connecting to the ODU should be terminated with the type-N connector.

l l l l l l
Ejector lever Electro-technical knife File Installation parts and accessories of the connector IF cable Waterproof adhesive tape
6-4
6 Part Replacement
Procedure
Step 1 Use the Web LCT to query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Turn off the ODU switch on the OptiX RTN 605 panel. Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable and the IF jump, and the IF cable and the ODU. Step 4 Use a multimeter to test the cable circuit so as to determine whether to make the IF cable with connectors again or replace the IF cable. If... Then...
If the IF cable with connectors need be made again Make new connectors for the IF cable. If the IF cable need be replaced Replace with a new IF cable.
Step 5 Connect the IF cable and the IF jump, and the IF cable and the ODU. Step 6 Waterproof the connectors at the two ends of the IF cable with the waterproof adhesive tape. Step 7 Turn on the ODU switch on the OptiX RTN 605 panel. Step 8 After the ODU starts to work, observe the ODU indicator on the OptiX RTN 605 panel. The ODU indicator should be on and green. Step 9 Query the current alarms of the IDU. There should be no new alarms. ----End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
6-5
7 Supporting Task
7
About This Chapter
Supporting Task
This topic describes the common maintenance operations. 7.1 Hardware Loopback Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection. 7.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time. 7.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events The Web LCT is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the NE layer. 7.4 Querying a Report You can obtain the version, manufacture, and radio link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report. 7.5 Software loopback Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. In the OptiX RTN 605, the tributary unit, IF ports, and Ethernet ports support loopback. 7.6 SCC Resetting SCC resetting is a process in which all the software modules on the SCC are reset, the SCC is re-initiated. 7.7 PRBS Test The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method for network maintenance and self-check. 7.8 Setting the Automatic Release Function To protect the NM and NE communication from improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU mute, loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time using the NMS.
7 Supporting Task
7.9 Configuring Performance Monitoring Status of NEs By default, the performance monitoring of NEs is enabled. You can disable or enable this function manually and set the period of the performance monitoring of NEs manually. 7.10 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms, which can be queried through the NMS but cannot be set through the NMS. 7.11 Querying the Working Status of an Ethernet Port Through the operation, you can learn about the enable/disable state, loopback status, and the actual working mode of an Ethernet port. 7.12 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. 7.13 Performing Statistics for the Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port You can perform this operation to perform statistics for the traffic flow on an Ethernet port within a specified period.
7-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7 Supporting Task
7.1 Hardware Loopback

Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection. Hardware loopback is classified into optical cable loopback, SDH/PDH cable loopback, and Ethernet port loopback.
l
Optical cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit optical fibers are connected through a fiber jumper on the ODF. In certain occasions, an optical attenuator is added based on the actual situation, to prevent the optical board from being damaged by the excessive receive optical power. SDH/PDH cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit SDH/PDH cables are connected through a short-circuiting cable or connector on the DDF. Ethernet port loopback indicates that the receive and transmit service signals on one Ethernet port are looped back through a special loopback Ethernet cable.
7.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters

The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time. 7.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for cleaning the fiber connectors. 7.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors. 7.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks Clean fiber adapters with optical cleaning sticks. This part describes the method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board. The method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges is the same.
7.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners

When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for cleaning the fiber connectors.
Prerequisite
l
Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Make sure that there is no laser light on the fiber connector. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to make sure that the fiber connector is contaminated.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Cartridge cleaner
7 Supporting Task
Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever, and the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area. Figure 7-1 CLETOP cassette cleaner
Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in the downward direction. Figure 7-2 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area
7-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7 Supporting Task
Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2. Figure 7-3 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area
Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area. ----End
7.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue

When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.
Prerequisite
l
Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected. Make sure there is no laser light present on the fiber connector. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to make sure that the fiber connector is contaminated.

l l l
Clean solvent Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7-5
7 Supporting Task
NOTE
l l l
Using the isoamylol as the clean solvent is recommended, and the propyl can also be used. Do not use alcohol or formalin. The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can replace the non-woven lens tissue. The special cleaning roll can replace the special compressed gas.
Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue. Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue. Figure 7-4 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue
Step 3 Repeat step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used. Step 4 Using compressed gas, blow off the fiber tip. When using compressed gas:
l l
First spray it into the air as the initial spray of condensation can contain some sediment. Keep the injector nozzle as close as possible to the connector surface without touching it.
----End
7.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks

Clean fiber adapters with optical cleaning sticks. This part describes the method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board. The method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges is the same.
7 Supporting Task
Prerequisite
l
Before you clean the fiber adapter, ensure that you remove the optical fiber and shut down the laser. For details about how to shut down a laser, refer to Setting the State of a Laser. Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber adapter is contaminated.

l l l
Optical cleaning sticks Clean solvent Special compressed gas

NOTE
l l l l
For the SC and FC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm, for the LC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm. The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can replace the optical cleaning stick. Using the isoamylol as the clean solvent is preferred, and the propyl can also be used. Do not use alcohol or formalin. The special cleaning roll can replace the special compressed gas.
Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick. Step 2 Hold the stick straight out from the adapter and turn the stick clockwise four to five times. Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can clean the adapter tip. Step 3 Using compressed gas, blow off the fiber tip. When using compressed gas:
l l
First spray it into the air as the initial spray of condensation can contain some sediment. Keep the injector nozzle as close as possible to the connector surface without touching it.
----End
7.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events

The Web LCT is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the NE layer. 7.3.1 Checking the NE Status You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status. 7.3.2 Checking the Board Status You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram. 7.3.3 Browsing the Current Alarms You can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms.
7 Supporting Task
7.3.4 Browsing History Alarms You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history alarms. 7.3.5 Browsing the Abnormal Events Periodically browsing abnormal events helps you to find abnormalities in the equipment in time. 7.3.6 Browsing Current Performance Events Periodically browsing the performance events helps you to check the long-term running status of the equipment. 7.3.7 Browsing the History Performance Periodically browsing the performance events helps you to check the long-term running status of the equipment. 7.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records You can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE by browsing the performance event threshold-crossing records.
7.3.1 Checking the NE Status

You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In NE List, check Communication Status of the NE. In normal cases, Communication Status is Normal. Step 2 If Login Status of the NE is Not Logged In, log in to the NE. 1. 2. Select the NE, and choose NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Specify User Name and Password.
l l
The user name is lct by default. The password of user lct is password by default.
NOTE
User lct has the authority at the system level.
3.
Click OK. The Login Status column switches to Logged In.
Step 3 Click NE Explorer. Step 4 Check NE STATE above Slot Layout.

7 Supporting Task
In normal cases, NE STATE is Running. ----End
7.3.2 Checking the Board Status

You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an NE in the Main Topology. Then, the Slot Layout is displayed. The NE should be in Running Status. Step 2 Click the icon. Then, the legend description is displayed.
Step 3 Check the running status of the boards according to the legend description. If a board is running normally, the board icon should be green. ----End
7.3.3 Browsing the Current Alarms

You can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and click the icon in the toolbar.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7-9
7 Supporting Task
TIP
You can also click an alarm indicator on the toolbar to display the alarms of the specific severity. From left to right, the alarm indicators and related alarm severities are as follows:
l l l l l
Red: critical alarm Orange: major alarm Yellow: minor alarm Purple: warning Light blue: abnormal event
NOTE
The number shown by each indicator indicates the number of current network-wide alarms, which are not cleared, of the specific severity.
The Browse Current Alarms tab is displayed by default. Step 2 Browse the displayed alarms. Step 3 Select the newly generated alarms, record the details of the alarms. Step 4 Notify the troubleshooting personnel to clear the alarms in time. ----End
Related Information
A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared.
7.3.4 Browsing History Alarms

You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history alarms.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and click the Step 2 Click the Browse History Alarm tab. Step 3 Click Filter. The Filter dialog box is displayed. 1. 2. 3. 4.
7-10
icon in the toolbar.
In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried. In Alarm Type, select the alarm type. In Rising Time, specify the alarm generation time. In Cleared Time, specify the alarm clearance time.
7 Supporting Task
The start time should be the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed, and the end time should be the current time. Step 4 Click Filter. Step 5 Browse the displayed history alarms. Step 6 Optional: Click Save As. Then, the history alarms are saved and archived as a file. ----End
Related Information
A history alarm is an alarm that has been cleared. An NE stores a maximum of 1,000 history alarms.
7.3.5 Browsing the Abnormal Events

Periodically browsing abnormal events helps you to find abnormalities in the equipment in time.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Alarm > Browse Abnormal Events from the Function Tree.
TIP
Alternatively, you can select an NE and then click the Events tab page.
icon to switch to the Browse Abnormal
Step 2 Click Filter. The Filter dialog box is displayed. 1. 2. Set Level and Type. In Abnormal Event, select Select All.
Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Browse the abnormal events. Step 5 Optional: Click Save As. Then, the abnormal events are saved and archived as a file. ----End
Related Information
An abnormal event is an abnormality that arises in the system at a particular time and not an abnormality that persists for a long time. Being different from alarms, an abnormal event has only occurrence time, with clearance time not provided.
7 Supporting Task
7.3.6 Browsing Current Performance Events

Periodically browsing the performance events helps you to check the long-term running status of the equipment.
Prerequisite
l l
The performance monitoring function must be enabled. The NE user must have the authority of NE monitor or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > Current Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 3 Select 15-Minute in the Monitor Period field. Step 4 Click Count, select all the performance events, and select Consecutive Severely Errored Second in Display Options. Step 5 Click Query. Step 6 Browse the current performance events. In normal cases, no bit error performance events is displayed, and the number of pointer justification events is less than six per day on each port. Step 7 Click Gauge, select all the performance events, and select Current Value and Maximum/ Minimum Value in Display Options. Step 8 Click Query. Step 9 Browse the current performance events. Compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as board temperature, do not change drastically. Step 10 Set Monitor Period to 24-Hour. Step 11 Repeat steps Step 4 to Step 9 query the performance events in a period of 24 hours. ----End
Related Information
The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.
7.3.7 Browsing the History Performance

Periodically browsing the performance events helps you to check the long-term running status of the equipment.
7 Supporting Task
Prerequisite
l l

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select a specific board from the NE Explorer, and choose Performance > History Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 3 Select 15-Minute after Monitor Period. Step 4 Specify the start time and end time of a specific time span. The time span starts from the time when the last history performance event browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 5 Select all the available performance events in Count, and select Zero Data in Display Options. Step 6 Click Query to browse the history performance events. Step 7 Click Save As. The system displays the text file that lists the history performance events.
NOTE
You can also save the text file as required.
Step 8 Select all the available performance events in Gauge, and select Current Value and Maximum/ Minimum Value in Display Options. Step 9 Click Query to browse the history performance events. Step 10 Click Save As to save the performance events. The system displays the text file that lists the history performance events.
NOTE
You can also save the text file as required.
Step 11 Select 24-Hour after Monitor Period. Step 12 Repeat Step 4 to Step 10 to query the history performance events in a period of 24 hours. ----End
Related Information
The history performance event refers to a performance event whose statistics period ends in the past. Only the performance events on the NE side can be queried using the Web LCT. Currently, the NE can store thirty 24-hour and six hundreds and seventy-two 15-minute history performance events related to the receive level and bit errors on the radio link; the NE can store a maximum of six 24-hour and sixteen 15-minute other history performance events.
7 Supporting Task
7.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records

You can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE by browsing the performance event threshold-crossing records.
Prerequisite
l l

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board, and then choose Performance > Performance Threshold-Crossing from the Function Tree. The Performance Threshold-Crossing dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 3 Select 15-Minute next to Monitor Period. Step 4 Specify the start time and the end time of a specific time span. The time span starts from the time when the last history performance event browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 5 In Performance Event Type, select Select All. Step 6 Optional: Specify Display Options. Step 7 Click Query. Browsing the threshold-crossing performance events. Step 8 Optional: Click Save As. A text file that lists the history performance events is displayed in the IE system.
NOTE
Step 9 Select 24-Hour next to Monitor Period. Step 10 Repeat steps Step 4 to Step 8 to query the performance events in a period of 24 hours. ----End
7.4 Querying a Report

You can obtain the version, manufacture, and radio link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report. 7.4.1 Querying a Board Information Report Through the Web LCT You can know the PCB version, logic version, and software version of each board by querying a board information report.
7 Supporting Task
7.4.2 Querying a Board Manufacture Information Report You can know the manufacture information of each board and the SFP module by querying a board manufacture information report. 7.4.3 Querying the Status of a Radio Link The Web LCT supports the end-to-end management of a microwave link. You can query the information about the two ends of a radio link in an interface.
7.4.1 Querying a Board Information Report Through the Web LCT

You can know the PCB version, logic version, and software version of each board by querying a board information report.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Report > Board Information Report from the Function Tree. Step 3 All the board version information of the NE is displayed in the Board Information Report tab page. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. The text file that describes the board information is displayed on the Internet Explorer.
NOTE
You can save the text file as required.
----End
Related Information
Focus on the PCB version, logic version, and software version of each board when you query the board information.
7.4.2 Querying a Board Manufacture Information Report

You can know the manufacture information of each board and the SFP module by querying a board manufacture information report.
Prerequisite
l l
The communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal. The NE user must have the authority of NE monitor or higher.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7 Supporting Task

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Report > Board Detail Information Report from the Function Tree. Step 3 All the board manufacture information of the NE is displayed in the Board Detail Information Report tab page. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. The text file that describes the detailed board information is displayed on the Internet Explorer.
NOTE
You can save the text file as required.
----End
7.4.3 Querying the Status of a Radio Link

The Web LCT supports the end-to-end management of a microwave link. You can query the information about the two ends of a radio link in an interface.
Prerequisite
l l
The communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal. The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab page, right-click the corresponding IF board, and then choose HOP Management from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the HOP Management Function Tree, choose Configuration > Link Configuration, and then click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 4 Select the corresponding IF board in the IF/ODU Configuration tab page, and then click Query. The configuration information of the links at two ends is displayed. Step 5 Check whether the configuration information of the link at one end is consistent with the configuration information of the link at the other end and whether the configuration information of the links at the two ends is correct. ----End
7-16
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7 Supporting Task
7.5 Software loopback

Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. In the OptiX RTN 605, the tributary unit, IF ports, and Ethernet ports support loopback. 7.5.1 Setting Tributary Loopback The OptiX RTN 605 supports the tributary inloop/outloop. 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port The OptiX RTN 605 1E/2E supports the IF port inloop/outloop. The OptiX RTN 605 1F/2F supports the IF port outloop. 7.5.3 Setting Loopback for the Ethernet Port of the RTN 605 1F/2F The RTN 605 1F/2F/1E/2E board supports the Ethernet port inloop at the PHY layer. 7.5.4 Locating the Fault by Performing Loopbacks Loopback is a common method to locate a fault.
7.5.1 Setting Tributary Loopback

The OptiX RTN 605 supports the tributary inloop/outloop.
Prerequisite
l l
Context
The tributary inloop is a process where signals at an E1 port are looped back at the tributary unit towards the IF unit. Figure 7-5 Inloop
IF unit
Tributary unit PDH
The tributary outloop is a process where an E1 signal is looped back at the tributary unit of the local IDU towards the remote equipment. Figure 7-6 Outloop
IF unit Tributary unit PDH
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7-17
7 Supporting Task
Precautions
CAUTION
l l
The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. A software loopback may be cleared automatically after some time (by default, it is cleared within five minutes). For details, see 7.8 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Choose By Function, and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down list. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path according to the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port

The OptiX RTN 605 1E/2E supports the IF port inloop/outloop. The OptiX RTN 605 1F/2F supports the IF port outloop.
Prerequisite
l l
Context
The IF port inloop is a process where the IF signals are looped back at the IF unit of the IDU towards the tributary unit. Figure 7-7 Inloop
Tributary unit IF signal IF unit
7-18
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7 Supporting Task
The IF port outloop of the IDU 605 is a process where the IF signals are looped back at the IF unit of the IDU towards the remote equipment. Figure 7-8 Outloop
Tributary unit IF unit IF signal
Precautions
CAUTION
l l
The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. A software loopback may be cleared automatically after some time (by default, it is cleared within five minutes). For details, see 7.8 Setting the Automatic Release Function. To perform the software loopback on the protection IF unit of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, switch the protection IF unit to the working state manually. Otherwise, the operation may fail. Before performing the loopback operation for the the RTN 605 1F/2F IF port, disable the AM function at the two ends of a link.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the IF board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Choose By Function, and select IF Port Loopback from the drop-down list. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path according to the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
7.5.3 Setting Loopback for the Ethernet Port of the RTN 605 1F/2F
The RTN 605 1F/2F/1E/2E board supports the Ethernet port inloop at the PHY layer.
7 Supporting Task
Prerequisite
l l
Context
The Ethernet port PHY inloop is a process where the Ethernet frame signals are looped back at the interface module of the board at the MAC layer toward the backplane. Figure 7-9 Inloop
Backplane Ethernet Service Processing Unit
PHY
Precautions
CAUTION
The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface > External Port > Basic Attributes from the Function Tree. Step 3 Choose External Port in the Ethernet Interface tab, and choose PHY Loopback in the Basic Attributes tab. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port according to the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
7.5.4 Locating the Fault by Performing Loopbacks

Loopback is a common method to locate a fault.
7 Supporting Task
Prerequisite
l l
Service Trail
Figure 7-10 shows how to locate a fault by performing loopback. Figure 7-10 Service trail
Tributary Unit PXC IF Unit ODU ODU IF Board PXC SDH Interface Board
NE1(IDU 605)
NE2(IDU 620)
Tributary Unit
PXC
IF Unit
ODU
ODU
IF Board
PXC
SDH Interface Board
NE4(IDU 605)
NE3(IDU 620)
Fiber
Procedure
Step 1 If the services are available on the radio links, first perform the inter-station loopback to locate the fault on a certain hop when using the loopback method. 1. Set the outloops for the SDH optical interface boards on NE2 and NE3, and then perform the inter-station loopback to locate the fault.
Step 2 After the fault is located to a certain radio link, perform the intra-station loopback to locate the fault to a certain NE or board. 1. Set inloop for the IF board or Set inloop for the IF port on the NEs at two ends of the radio link where the fault occurs, and then locate the fault to the service receiver or the radio link. If the fault is located in the service receiver, Replace the IDU to locate the fault. If the radio link is faulty, replace the board to locate the fault to the ODU.
2. 3.
----End
7 Supporting Task
7.6 SCC Resetting

SCC resetting is a process in which all the software modules on the SCC are reset, the SCC is re-initiated.
Prerequisite
l l
The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE. The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.
Precautions
During the resetting, protection switching and NMS operations are unavailable although the running services are not affected.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Slot Layout of the Web LCT, right-click the SCC to be reset. Step 2 Choose SCC Reset from the shortcut menu. A prompt dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click OK. The system displays the Operation Succeed dialog box. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
7.7 PRBS Test

The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method for network maintenance and self-check. 7.7.1 PRBS Test of the Tributary Unit In the absence of a special test tool, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the tributary unit of the IDU 605. 7.7.2 PRBS Test of the IF Unit In the absence of a special test tool, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the OptiX RTN 605 1F/2F.
7.7.1 PRBS Test of the Tributary Unit

In the absence of a special test tool, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the tributary unit of the IDU 605.
Prerequisite
l
The communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal.
7-22

l
7 Supporting Task
The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.
Context
The OptiX RTN 605 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and the cross-connect direction.
NOTE
The cross-connect direction of the RTN 605 refers to the IF direction.
The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be used to check the connection between the tributary unit and the DDF, as shown in Figure 7-11. Figure 7-11 PRBS test in the tributary direction
DDF frame Tributary unit PRBS Transmitter 1 PRBS Recevicer 1 Inloop at the DDF frame
The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be used to check the connection between the tributary unit and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 7-12. Figure 7-12 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction
Tributary unit PRBS Transmitter 1 PRBS Receiver IN 2 IF unit OUT IF unit
Local NE 1 IF port inloop 2 IF port outloop
Remote NE
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7-23
7 Supporting Task
Precautions
CAUTION
l l
During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted. The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the loopback at the proper location. For details, see Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-12. Step 2 Select an E1 interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. The PRBS Test tab page is displayed. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. Step 5 Specify Direction, Duration, and Measured in Time.
NOTE
l l
The PRBS test supports three time units: one second, 10 minutes, and one hour. A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.
Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. Step 7 Click Start the test. The The operation may interrupt the service. Are you sure to continue? dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 When Progress in the PRBS Test tab page is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
NOTE
The result of the PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid.

l l l
Normal: It indicates that the path is working properly. The number of PRBSs should be zero, and the curve should be in green. Error: It indicates that the path has errors. The number of PRBSs should be greater than zero, and the curve should be in red. Invalid: It indicates that no bit is received. The curve should be in yellow.
----End
7.7.2 PRBS Test of the IF Unit

In the absence of a special test tool, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the OptiX RTN 605 1F/2F.
7 Supporting Task
Prerequisite
l l
Precautions
CAUTION
l l l
During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted. The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction. The protection IF unit does not support the PRBS test. Hence, you need to power off the working ODU and perform the PRBS test on the working IF unit if you need to test the protection radio link. In this manner, the PRBS signals from the protection IF unit are transmitted through the protection bus, and thus PRBS test is performed for the protection radio link.
Procedure
Step 1 See 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port to perform the inloop on the ODU. Step 2 Select an IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. The PRBS Test tab page is displayed. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. Step 5 Specify Direction, Duration, and Measured in Time.
NOTE
l l
The PRBS test supports three time units: one second, 10 minutes, and one hour. A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.
Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. Step 7 Click Start the test. The The operation may interrupt the service. Are you sure to continue? dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 When Progress in the PRBS Test tab page is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7-25
7 Supporting Task
NOTE
The result of the PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid.

l l l
Normal: It indicates that the path is working properly. The number of PRBSs should be zero, and the curve should be in green. Error: It indicates that the path has errors. The number of PRBSs should be greater than zero, and the curve should be in red. Invalid: It indicates that no bit is received. The curve should be in yellow.
----End
7.8 Setting the Automatic Release Function

To protect the NM and NE communication from improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU mute, loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time using the NMS.
Prerequisite
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Function Tree. Step 3 Specify Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time (min). Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function. ----End
7.9 Configuring Performance Monitoring Status of NEs

By default, the performance monitoring of NEs is enabled. You can disable or enable this function manually and set the period of the performance monitoring of NEs manually.
Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor Time from the Function Tree.
7 Supporting Task
Step 2 Set the parameters of NE performance monitoring. 1. 2. 3. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour. Select Enable or Disable in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.
NOTE
l l l
Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are generally set to Enable. You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enable in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area. You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enable and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
7.10 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel

The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms, which can be queried through the NMS but cannot be set through the NMS.
Prerequisite
l l

Web LCT
7 Supporting Task
Procedure
Step 1 Select A PDH tributary board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Board/Port(Channel). Step 4 Select Port in the list. Step 5 Select a port, and check Port Impedance. ----End
7.11 Querying the Working Status of an Ethernet Port

Through the operation, you can learn about the enable/disable state, loopback status, and the actual working mode of an Ethernet port.
Prerequisite
l l

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select External Port. Step 4 By default, click the Basic Attributes tab page. Step 5 Check Enabled/Disabled, Working Mode, and Port Physical Parameters of the associated port. ----End
7.12 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port

The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold.
Prerequisite
l
The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.

7-28

l
7 Supporting Task
The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

Web LCT
Context
This operation can be performed on the PORT port of the EM4T board, which is a logical board of the OptiX RTN 605 1E/2E.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the required Ethernet board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select External Port. Step 4 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 5 Set Zero-Flow Monitor to Enable. Step 6 Set Flow Threshold(Mbps). Step 7 Optional: Set Zero-Flow Monitor Interval(min).
l
If this parameter takes the default value of 0, the FLOW_OVER alarm is reported whenever the traffic flow received on the port exceeds Flow Threshold(Mbps). If the value of this parameter is not 0, the FLOW_OVER alarm is reported only when the traffic flow received on the port within a period of Zero-Flow Monitor Interval(min) always exceeds Flow Threshold(Mbps).
Step 8 Click Apply. ----End
7.13 Performing Statistics for the Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port

You can perform this operation to perform statistics for the traffic flow on an Ethernet port within a specified period.
Prerequisite
l l l
The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE. The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher. The flow monitoring function must be enabled on the associated Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring function on a port, do as follows: 1. 2. Select the required Ethernet board from the Object Tree. Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Traffic Monitor from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
7 Supporting Task
3. 4.
Select the Set Monitoring tab. Set Monitor Status to Enabled for the Ethernet port.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

Web LCT
Context
l
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days. This operation can be performed on the PORT port of the EM4T board, which is a logical board of the OptiX RTN 605 1E/2E.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the required Ethernet board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Traffic Monitor from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select the Query traffic tab. Step 4 Set the object to be queried, the required time, and display mode, and then click Query. The system displays the query result in a table or in a graph. ----End
7-30
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Alarm Reference
Alarms are important indicators when exceptions occur on the equipment. This topic describes all the possible alarms on the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these alarms. A.1 Alarm List The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 605 in alphabetical order. A.2 Alarms and Handling Procedures This topic describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 605 in an alphabet order and how to handle these alarms.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-1
A Alarm Reference
A.1 Alarm List

The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 605 in alphabetical order. Table A-1 Alarm list Alarm Name BD_STATUS CONFIG_NOSUP PORT DBMS_ERROR DBMS_PROTECT _MODE DOWN_E1_AIS E1_LOC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISM ERGE ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEX PERI EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS EX_ETHOAM_M PID_CNFLCT ETH_LOS ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_RMT_ LOOP ETHOAM_RMT_ SD Description Board not in position Configuration is not supported. Database errors Database in protection mode Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s downstream signals Loss of 2M clock in upstream signals Loss of connectivity Misconnection An MEP fails to receive CCM packets. Errored frames Loss of periodical connectivity check packets Conflict of MPIDs Loss of Ethernet port connection Discovery failure detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM Remote loopback detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM Remote Ethernet performance degradation detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM Level Major Major Major Critical Minor Major Critical Critical Minor Critical Critical Major Critical Minor Minor Minor Source ODU ODU SCC SCC PH1 PH1 EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T
A-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Alarm Name ETHOAM_RMT_ CRIT_FAULT FLOW_OVER LAG_PORT_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_ LOOP HARD_BAD
Description Severe fault detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM at the remote end Excessive data traffic received by Ethernet ports A port of an LAG fails. MAC port loopback detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM Hardware fault
Level Minor
Source EMS4, EM4T
Minor Minor Major Critical
EM4T EMS4, EM4T EMS4, EM4T SCC, ODU, IF0, PW48A, PW48B, IFH1, EMS4, EM4T IF0, IFH1 ODU ODU, IF0, PH1, IFH1, EMS4, EM4T SCC IF0, IFH1 IF0, IFH1 IF0, IFH1 IF0, IFH1 IF0, IFH1 IF0, IFH1 SCC SCC ODU, PW48A, PW48B IF0, IFH1 IF0, IFH1
IF_CABLE_OPEN IF_INPWR_ABN LOOP_ALM MSSW_DIFFERE NT MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCO R MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_RDI NESF_LOST NESTATE_INSTA LL POWER_ALM R_LOC R_LOF
IF cables are disconnected. The power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal. A loopback occurs. The active board and the standby board have inconsistent software. Excessive errors on radio links Signal degradation due to excessive errors on radio links Uncorrectable errors in RS encoding Label mismatch on radio links Loss of RS frames Remote defect indication on radio links Loss of NE software The NE is in the installation state. Power module alarm Loss of clock on the receive line side Loss of frame on the receive line side
Major Major Minor Major Minor Minor Minor Major Critical Minor Critical Critical Major Critical Critical
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-3
A Alarm Reference
Alarm Name R_LOS RADIO_FADING_ MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_MUTE RADIO_RSL_HIG H RADIO_RSL_LO W RADIO_TSL_HIG H RADIO_TSL_LO W RELAY_ALARM RP_LOC RPS_INDI SWDL_ACTIVAT ED_TIMEOUT SWDL_AUTOMA TCH_INH SWDL_CHGMNG _NOMATCH SWDL_COMMIT_ FAIL SWDL_INPROCE SS SWDL_NEPKGC HECK SWDL_PKG_NOB DSOFT SWDL_ROLLBAC K_FAIL
Description Loss of signal on the receive line side Radio fading margin is insufficient. Antennas are not aligned. The radio transmitter is muted. Over high radio receive signal level Over low radio receive signal level Over high radio transmit signal level Over low radio transmit signal level Relay alarm Loss of the received phaselocked clock Indication of the radio protection switching The activation timeout of the software package The automatic match function is disabled The board software version and the running software version are inconsistent NE submission failure The NE is in the process of package loading. Loss of files in a software package Files are deleted when they are customized. The version rollback on an NE fails.
Level Critical Minor Minor Warning Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Major Major Critical Minor Critical
Source IF0 ODU ODU ODU ODU ODU ODU ODU EOW SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC
Minor Minor Critical Minor Minor
SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC
A-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Alarm Name T_ALOS TEMP_ALARM UP_E1_AIS VOLT_LOS
Description Loss of analog signals at 2 Mbit/ s interfaces The ambient temperature of the board crosses the threshold. Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s upstream signals Loss of voltage
Level Major Minor Minor Major
Source PH1 SCC, ODU PH1 IF0, PW48A, PW48B, IFH1
NOTE
All alarmed boards refer to the logical boards displayed on the NMS.
A.2 Alarms and Handling Procedures

This topic describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 605 in an alphabet order and how to handle these alarms.
A.2.1 BD_STATUS
Description
The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is not in position.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System

The ODU fails to work.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: Other alarms are generated. Cause 2: The ODU is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-5
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Other alarms are generated. (1) Query the IDU 605 to see whether the HARD_BAD, IF_CABLE_OPEN or VOLT_LOS alarm is generated. If... Yes No Then... Clear these alarms first. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when the ODU is faulty.
Step 2 Cause 2: The ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU that reports the alarm. For details, see 6.2 Replacing an ODU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.2 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
Description
The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. This alarm is reported if an ODU detects that the specified parameters do not meet the requirements of the ODU.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
A-6
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
l l l l l l
Parameter 1 Indicates that the configuration data does not meet the specified requirement. 0x01: The frequency is set incorrectly. 0x02: The T/R spacing is set incorrectly. 0x03: The transmit power is set incorrectly. 0x04: The ATPC threshold is set incorrectly. 0x05: The bandwidth is set incorrectly. 0x06: The modulation mode is set incorrectly.

The ODU fails to work normally. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD protection, the active ODU generates the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. In this case, IF 1+1 protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements. (1) Determine the parameter that does not meet the requirement according to the alarm parameter. Then, handle the fault accordingly. If... The alarm parameter takes a value from 0x01 to 0x03 The alarm parameter takes a value from 0x04 to 0x06 Then... Run Step 1.2. Run Step 1.3.
(2) Check whether the parameters of the ODU interface meet the requirements of network planning. For details, see Setting Parameters of ODU Interfaces. If... Yes No Then... Replace the ODU with a correct one. Modify the parameters of the ODU interface.
(3) Check whether the parameters of the IF interface meet the requirements of network planning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If... Yes No ----End
Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-7
Then... Replace the IDU. Configure the IF/ODU information of radio links.
A Alarm Reference
Related Information
None.
A.2.3 DBMS_ERROR
Description
The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the processing of the system database.
Attribute
Parameters
A-8
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
l l l l l
Parameter 1 Indicates the types of the database errors. 0x01: The input parameters are invalid. 0x02: The database files do not exist. 0x03: The database memory area numbers are incorrect. 0x04: The database overwriting occurs. 0x05: Errors occur in the header information check in the database backup area. 0x06: Errors occur in the FAT table structure check in the database storage area. 0x07: Errors occur in the database check in the database backup area. 0x08: Restoring the database fails. 0x09: The database ID is invalid. 0x0A: The databases are different. 0x0B: The data is unchecked. 0x0E: The semaphore handle is invalid. 0x0F: Errors occur in applying for memory. 0x10: Errors occur in releasing memory. 0x12: Transmitting the message capsule fails. 0x13: The starting and ending records of the database are incorrect. 0x14: The database is null. 0x15: The flag is incorrectly set. 0x16: The input command parameters are incorrect. 0x17: Non-backup database. 0x18: The database is in protection mode. 0x19: The configuration is not verified.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Parameter 2 Indicates the errored data storage area.

l l l
0x00: database in fdb0 0x01: database in fdb1 0x02: database in drdb
Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the errored database.

l l
0x00: all databases in the entire storage area. 0x01-0xff: ID of the errored database

When the DBMS_ERROR alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.
A Alarm Reference
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. Cause 2: The IDU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database operation fails. (1) Reset the SCC board. For details, see Resetting the SCC board. If... The alarm clears after the board is reset The alarm persists after the board is reset Step 2 Cause 2: The IDU is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU. ----End Then... End the fault handling. Go to Cause 2.
Related Information
None.
A.2.4 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
Description
The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protection mode.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm
Parameters
None.

When the DBMS_PROTECT_MODE alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The data enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.
A-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The data enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software. (1) Replace the IDU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.5 DOWN_E1_AIS
Description
The DOWN_E1_AIS is an alarm of the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal. This alarm occurs when the IDU detects the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal of all 1s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported in path 1.

The E1 signal is unavailable.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The opposite site transmits the E1_AIS alarm. Cause 2: The IDU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite site transmits the E1_AIS alarm.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Check whether the opposite site reports the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm. If... Then...
The opposite site reports the UP_E1_AIS Clear the alarm immediately. or T_ALOS alarm The opposite site does not report the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm Solve the problem according to the solution for the problem that occurs when a board is faulty.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IDU on the local site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.6 E1_LOC
Description
The E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the upstream 2M clock is lost. This alarm occurs when a tributary board fails to extract the clock from E1 signals.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the tributary port (path) that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port (path) 1 of the tributary board.

When E1_LOC occurs, the service is not affected.
A Alarm Reference
Possible Causes
l l l l
Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The line sequence of the cable is incorrect. Cause 3: The IDU on the local NE is faulty. Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. (1) Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. Step 2 Cause 2: The line sequence of the cable is incorrect. (1) Redo the cable. Step 3 Cause 3: The IDU on the local NE is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU of the local site. Step 4 Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform. (1) Check whether any external interference causes the abnormal waveform of the E1 signal. If... There is external interference There is no external interference ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Contact Huawei engineers.
Related Information
None.
A.2.7 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
Description
The ETH_CFM_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating an incorrect connection. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet whose MA ID mismatches or whose priority is lower.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
A Alarm Reference
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicate the ID of the port that reports the alarm. Indicate the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l l l
0x00: The port is direction insensitive. 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level)
Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.

l l l l l l l l
0x00: consumer MEP level (low). 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium). 0x02: consumer MEP level (high). 0x03: provider MEP level (low). 0x04: provider MEP level (high). 0x05: operator MEP level (low). 0x06: operator MEP level (medium). 0x07: operator MEP level (high).
NOTE Consumer indicates the customer, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

The services among relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted or the data flow may be incorrectly routed.
Possible Causes
l
Cause 1: The names of the MDs and the MAs that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. Cause 2: The levels of the MDs that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The names of the MDs and the MAs that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. (1) Check whether the names of the MDs and the MAs that the standard MEPs correspond to are the same.
A-14
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
If... The MD names or MA names are different The MD names or MA names are the same at both ends
Then... Re-configure the MA names and MA names to ensure consistency at both ends. Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The levels of the MDs that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. (1) Check whether the MD levels of the standard MEPs are the same. If... The MD levels are different Then... Re-configure the MD levels to ensure consistency at both ends.
The MD levels are the same at both ends Go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect. (1) Check the physical connection of the Ethernet service route and rectify the fault on the physical connection if any. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.8 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
Description
The ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI is an alarm indicating the errored frame. This alarm occurs when the system receives invalid CCM packets.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port)
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Meaning Indicate the ID of the port that reports the alarm.
A-15
A Alarm Reference
Name Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction)
Meaning Indicate the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l l l
Parameter 8 (Level)

l l l l l l l l

l l
The LB and LT detection functions of IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM are unavailable. The service may become abnormal due to the loop.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends are inconsistent. For example, the connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received. Cause 4: A software fault occurs at the MEP at the transmit end.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. (1) Check whether the remote MEP is configured. If not, configure the remote MEP first. Step 2 Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends are inconsistent. For example, the connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. (1) Check whether the CC periods set at the MEPs are the same. If... Then...
The CC periods are different Change the CC periods to ensure consistency at both ends.
A Alarm Reference
If...
Then...
The CC periods are the same Go to the next step. (2) Check whether the IDs of the MEPs in the maintenance domain are in conflict. If... The IDs are in conflict The IDs are not in conflict Then... Change the conflicting IDs. Go to Cause 2.
Step 3 Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received. (1) Enable the loop detection function of IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM. Check whether any loop exists at each IP port of the service trail. If yes, release the loop and clear the alarm. Step 4 Cause 4: A software fault occurs at the MEP at the transmit end. (1) Perform a warm reset on the Ethernet board where the remote MEP is located. For details, see Warm Resetting. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.9 ETH_CFM_LOC
Description
The ETH_CFM_LOC is an alarm indicating the loss of connectivity. This alarm occurs when the system fails to receive CCM packets from the remote MEP in 3.5 connectivity check (CC) periods successively.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID)
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Meaning Indicate the number of the port where the alarm is reported. Indicate the VLAN ID of the MEP.
A-17
A Alarm Reference
Name Parameter 7 (Direction)
Meaning Indicates the direction of the local MEP.

l l l
Parameter 8 (Level)

l l l l l l l l
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID)
Indicate the ID of the remote MEP.

l l
The LB and LT detection functions of IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM are unavailable. The services among relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. (1) Check whether the physical links (such as cables or fibers) connecting the services at the MEPs of the two ends are correct. If... Then...
The connection is not correct Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links. The connection is correct Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Check whether the Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is configured correctly. If... Then...
The connection is not correct Modify the configuration of the Ethernet services to ensure consistency at both ends. The connection is correct Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network. (1) Check the utilization of bandwidth. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.10 ETH_CFM_RDI
Description
The ETH_CFM_RDI is an alarm indicating CCM packets with RDI received from the remote MEP. This alarm occurs when the system receives CCM packets with RDI from the remote MEP.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Meaning Indicate the ID of the port that reports the alarm. Indicate the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-19
A Alarm Reference
Name Parameter 7 (Direction)
Meaning Indicate the direction of the local MEP.

l l l
Parameter 8 (Level)

l l l l l l l l
0x00:0x00: consumer MEP level (low). 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium). 0x02: consumer MEP level (high). 0x03: provider MEP level (low). 0x04: provider MEP level (high). 0x05: operator MEP level (low). 0x06: operator MEP level (medium). 0x07: operator MEP level (high).
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID)
Indicate the ID of the remote MEP.

l
The LoopBack (LB) and LinkTrace (LT) detection functions of IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM are unavailable. The services among relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive correct CCM packets. Cause 2: The software is reset or another software fault occurs at the remote MEP.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive correct CCM packets. (1) Determine the port that reports the alarm according to the alarm parameters. (2) Check whether the remote MEP that is connected to the port reports the ETH_CFM_LOC, ETH_CFM_MISMERGE, or ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI alarm. If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No such alarms occur Then... Clear the alarm at the remote end. Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The software is reset or another software fault occurs at the remote MEP. (1) Check whether the equipment at the remote MEP is reset.
A Alarm Reference
If... The equipment is reset
Then... Rectify the fault and then end the alarm handling.
The alarm is not reported Perform a warm reset on the board where the remote MEP is located. For details, see Warm Resetting. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.11 ETH_LOS
Description
The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of Ethernet port connection.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by Ethernet port 1 of the board.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.

When the ETH_LOS alarm occurs, the service at the port that reports the alarm is interrupted.
Possible Causes
l
Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. Cause 2: The link of electrical cable or optical fiber is faulty. Cause 3: The equipment is faulty.
l l
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. (1) Check whether the transmit port and receive port work in the same mode. If... Then...
The transmit port and receive port work Correctly set the working modes of the in different modes transmit port and receive port. The transmit port and receive port work Go to Cause 2. in the same mode Step 2 Cause 2: The link of electrical cable or optical fiber is faulty. (1) Check the network cable or optical fiber connected to the port that reports the alarm. If... The network cable is loose or damaged Then... Connect the network cable properly or replace the damaged network cable.
The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean the connector. The connector is loosely connected or damaged The connection is normal Step 3 Cause 3: The equipment is faulty. (1) Check whether any fault occurs on the equipment interconnected with the port that reports the alarm. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal ----End Then... Rectify the fault. Replace the IDU of the local site. Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper. Go to Cause 3.
Related Information
None.
A.2.12 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
Description
The ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet OAM negotiation fails. This alarm occurs when the OAM function is enabled at a port of a board and the negotiation between the port and the opposite equipment fails.
A-22
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails.
l l l l
0x01: A fault occurs on the local receive link. 0x02: The local end fails to transmit OAM packets. 0x03: The OAM packets from the opposite end are not received. 0x04: The OAM configuration of the opposite end does not meet the requirements of the local end. 0x05: The OAM configuration of the local end does not meet the requirements of the opposite end. 0x06-0xFF: Other unknown reasons.

The OAM function based on IEEE802.3ah is unavailable.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. (1) Check whether the physical port is faulty. Replace the IDU. Step 2 Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Enable the P2P OAM protocol at the opposite end. For details, see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function. Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. (1) Reconfigure the P2P OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends. For details, see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.13 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT is an alarm indicating that a critical fault occurs regarding the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function at the remote end. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives the OAM packets that contain critical fault information from the opposite end.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the fault.
l l
0x01: A link fault occurs at the port of the opposite end. 0x02: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the opposite end. 0x03-0xFF: Other faults.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-24
A Alarm Reference

When the ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT alarm occurs, the services on the link may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the fault type according to Parameter 4 and handle the fault accordingly. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03-0xFF, Step 2 Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. (1) Handle ETH_LOS of the remote port. Step 3 Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. (1) Handle the problems such as power failure at the remote MEP. Step 4 Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP. (1) Contact Huawei technical support engineers. ----End Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3.
Related Information
None.
A.2.14 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function detects a remote loopback. This alarm occurs when the local equipment initiates a remote loopback or responds to the remote loopback initiated by the opposite equipment.
Attribute
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-25
A Alarm Reference
Parameters
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4

l l
0x01: The local equipment initiates a remote loopback. 0x02: The local equipment responds to the remote loopback initiated by the opposite equipment.

When the ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP alarm occurs, the services on the link are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l
Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the loopback is initiated by the local end or by the remote end. Step 2 Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. (1) Determine the causes of the loopback at the local end and release the loopback. Step 3 Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command. (1) Determine the causes of the loopback at the opposite end and release the loopback. ----End
Related Information
None.
A-26
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
A.2.15 ETHOAM_RMT_SD
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_SD is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function detects signal degradation at the remote end. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives link event notification packets from the opposite end.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Indicates the type of the received link event:
l l l
0x01: Errored frame event 0x02: Errored frame period event 0x03: Errored frame second event

When the ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm occurs, the performance of services degrade.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. (1) Check whether the link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.
A Alarm Reference
If... The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end The link event notification function is disabled at the opposite end
Then... Disable the link event notification function at the opposite end. Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. (1) Check whether the link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate. If... The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate Step 3 Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates. (1) Improve the link performance at the opposite end so that the opposite end does not send any link event packet to the local end. Then, the ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm at the local end clears automatically. ----End Then... Set the thresholds to appropriate values. Go to Cause 3.
Related Information
None.
A.2.16 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP is an alarm indicating the loopback of the MAC port that runs the point-to-point OAM protocol. This alarm occurs when the MAC port of a board receives the OAM protocol packets sent by the port or the board after the loopback detection function is enabled.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environmental alarms
Parameters
A Alarm Reference
Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4
Meaning Indicates the port ID. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Indicates the loopback type.
l l l
0x01: self-loop of the port. 0x02: self-loop of the board. 0x03-0xFF: unknown types.

A network storm may occur owing to the loopback.
Possible Causes
l
Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is accessed to a LAN that has a loopback, or a PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are accessed to the same LAN.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the loopback type according to Parameter 4, and then handle the loopback accordingly. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is accessed to a LAN that has a loopback, or a PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. If... The PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port Then... Manually release the PHY/MAC loopback (or wait five minutes for the automatic release by the NMS). Then, the self-loop is released.
A self-loop is performed at the cables of the Reconnect the cables to release the self-loop. port The port is accessed to a LAN with a selfloop Release the loopback of the LAN, or disconnect the port from the LAN.
Step 3 Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are accessed to the same LAN. (1) Check whether two ports of the board are connected through cables or whether two ports of the board are accessed to the same LAN.
A Alarm Reference
If... The two ports are connected through cables The two ports are accessed to the same LAN ----End
Then... Disconnect the cables to release the selfloop. Disconnect a port from the LAN to release the self-loop.
Related Information
None.
A.2.17 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of periodic connectivity check (CC) packets. This alarm occurs when the sink MEP fails to receive CC packets from the same source MEP in a period (3.5 transmission periods of CC packets at the source MEP).
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the MEP that reports the alarm.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the Ethernet port that reports the alarm.
l l
Port number: 0x0001-0x0000 + MAX_ETH_PORT. VCTRUNK port number: 0x8001-0x8000 + MAX_ETH_VCTRUNK.

l MAX_ETH_PORT indicates the maximum MAC port number
NOTE supported by a board.

l MAX_ETH_VCTRUNK indicates the maximum VCTRUNK port
number supported by a board.
A-30
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Indicate the service VLAN ID.

l
For a service with a VLAN tag, the VLAN ID ranges from 0x0000 to 0x0FFF. For a service without any VLAN tag, the VLAN ID is 0xFFFF.
Parameter 6
Indicates the maintenance domain level.

l l l l l l l l
0x00: consumer MEP level (high). 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium). 0x02: consumer MEP level (low). 0x03: provider MEP level (high). 0x04: provider MEP level (low). 0x05: operator MEP level (high). 0x06: operator MEP level (medium). 0x07: operator MEP level (low).
Consumer indicates the customer, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
NOTE
Parameter 7 Parameter 8
Indicates the source MEP ID of CC packets. Indicates the sink MEP ID of CC packets.
NOTE The sink MEP ID of CC packets is the ID of the MEP that reports the alarm. Parameter 1 and Parameter 8 indicate the same information.

A unidirectional connectivity failure occurs in the Ethernet service between two MEPs.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. (1) Check whether the physical links (such as network cables or optical fibers) that carry services between the two MEPs are correctly connected.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-31
A Alarm Reference
If... The physical links are incorrectly connected
Then... Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links.
The physical links are correctly connected Go to Cause 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. (1) Check whether the Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are configured correctly. If... The Ethernet services are configured incorrectly The Ethernet services are configured correctly Then... Change the configuration and ensure consistency at both ends. Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted. (1) Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.18 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT is an alarm indicating the conflict of MPIDs. This alarm occurs when two MEPs on one MD have the same maintenance point identity (MPID) and one MEP receives the packets from the other MEP.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm
Parameters
A Alarm Reference
Name Parameter 1
Meaning Indicates the MPID associated with the alarm.
Parameters 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the number of the Ethernet port that reports the alarm.
l l
MAC port number: 0x0001-0x0000 + MAX_ETH_PORT. VCTRUNK port number: 0x8001-0x8000 + MAX_ETH_VCTRUNK.
l MAX_ETH_PORT indicates the maximum MAC port number
NOTE supported by a board.

l MAX_ETH_VCTRUNK indicates the maximum VCTRUNK port
number supported by a board.
Parameters 4, Parameter 5 Indicate the service VLAN ID.

l
For a service with a VLAN tag, the VLAN ID ranges from 0x0000 to 0x0FFF. For a service without any VLAN tag, the VLAN ID is 0xFFFF.
Parameter 6
Indicates the maintenance domain level.

l l l l l l l l
0x00: Consumer MEP level (high). 0x01: Consumer MEP level (middle). 0x02: Consumer MEP level (low). 0x03: Provider MEP level (high). 0x04: Provider MEP level (low). 0x05: Operator MEP level (high). 0x06: Operator MEP level (medium). 0x07: Operator MEP level (low).
Consumer indicates the customer, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
NOTE
Parameter 7
Indicates the ID of the local MEP.

NOTE The ID of the local MEP is the ID of the MEP that reports the alarm. Parameter 1 and Parameter 7 indicate the same information.

MPIDs must be unique on a network. When the EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT alarm occurs, the LB and LT functions are abnormal and OAM packets are received incorrectly.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID. (1) Check this alarm on the NMS. Determine the associated MPID according to Parameter 1. (2) Query the information about the MEP. Delete the incorrect MEPs and create MEPs with unique MPIDs. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.19 FLOW_OVER
Description
The FLOW_OVER is an alarm indicating that the data flow received by the Ethernet port exceeds the threshold.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the path that reports the alarm. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the subboard. Parameter 3 Indicates the port ID. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by Ethernet port 1 of the board.

When the FLOW_OVER alarm occurs, the extra data may be discarded by the port.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow.
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow. (1) Configure the QoS policies at the opposite end to reduce the data flow that the opposite end transmits to the local end. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.20 HARD_BAD
Description
The HARD_BAD is an alarm indicating hardware errors.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm
Parameters
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-35
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the fault. 0x01: The power module is working abnormally. 0x02: The board is installed improperly. 0x03: 38 MHz system clock 1 is abnormal. 0x04: 38 MHz system clock 2 is abnormal. 0x05: 2 MHz clock source is abnormal. 0x06: The digital phase-locked loop is abnormal. 0x07: The 38 MHz service clock is lost. 0x08: The bus is abnormal. 0x09: The TPS protection board is abnormal. 0x0A: The primary crystal oscillator stops oscillating. 0x0B: The frequency offset of the primary crystal oscillator is excessive. 0x0C: The secondary crystal oscillator stops oscillating. 0x0D: The processor (CPU/DSP/coprocessor) is faulty. 0x0E: The storage components are faulty. 0x0F: The programmable logic device is faulty. 0x10: The SDH components are faulty. 0x11: The data communication components are faulty. 0x12: The clock components are faulty. 0x13: The interface components are faulty. 0x14: The power components are faulty. 0x15: Another fault occurs. 0x16: The analog phase-locked loop is abnormal. 0x17: The 32 MHz clock is unavailable. 0x18: The 66 MHz clock is unavailable. 0x19: The 25 MHz clock is unavailable.

The board that reports the alarm fails to work. If the board is configured with 1+1 protection, the protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
Cause of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The IDU is faulty. Cause of the alarm reported by a board of the ODU: The ODU is faulty.
A-36
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The IDU is faulty. (1) Power on the IDU again. If... The alarm disappears after the IDU is powered on The alarm persists after the IDU is powered on (2) Replace the IDU. Step 2 Cause of the alarm reported by a board of the ODU: The ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU that reports the alarm. For details, see 6.2 Replacing an ODU. ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.
Related Information
None.
A.2.21 IF_CABLE_OPEN
Description
The IF_CABLE_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the IF cable is open-circuited.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by IF port 1 of the corresponding board.

The services on the IF port are interrupted.
A Alarm Reference
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. Cause 2: The IF port of the IDU is damaged. Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is not made properly. (1) Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is not made properly. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. If... The connector is loose The connector is not made properly None of the above Then... Connect the connector tightly. Make a new IF cable connector. Go to the next step.
(2) Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged, and test the connectivity between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. For details, see Testing the connectivity between cables. If... The cable does not meet the specified requirement The cable meets the specified requirement Then... Replace the cable with a proper one. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IF port of the IDU is damaged. (1) Replace the IDU. Step 3 Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU connected to the IF board that reports the alarm. ----End
Related Information
NOTE
When rectifying the faults on the IF cable, IF port, and ODU, you must turn off the ODU before the operation. You can turn on the ODU only after the operation is complete.
A.2.22 IF_INPWR_ABN
A Alarm Reference
Description
The IF_INPWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the input IF power of the ODU is abnormal.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning
l l
0x01: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is over high. 0x02: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is over low.

The services on the ODU are interrupted. If 1+1 protection is configured, 1+1 HSB switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The IDU is faulty. Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty. Cause 3: The ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IDU is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU. Step 2 Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty. (1) Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is not made properly. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. If... The connector is loose Then... Connect the connector tightly.
The connector is not made properly Terminating the IF Cable with Connectors again.
A Alarm Reference
If... None of the above
Then... Go to the next step.
(2) Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged or deformed, and test the connectivity between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. For details, see Testing the Connectivity of the IF Cable. If... The cable does not meet the specified requirement The cable meets the specified requirement Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU that reports the alarm. ----End Then... Replace the cable with a proper one. The IF board or ODU may be faulty.
Related Information
The number of the logical slot for the ODU is the slot number of the IF board connected to the ODU plus 10.
A.2.23 LAG_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a port in the LAG of the Ethernet fails. This alarm occurs when a port in the LAG is unavailable.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port. The values are always 0x00 0x01.
A-40
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Name Parameter 4
Meaning Indicates the cause of the protection failure.

l l l l l
0x01: Indicates that the link of the port is faulty or fails. 0x02: Indicates that the port is in half-duplex mode. 0x03: Indicates that the port fails to receive LACP packets. 0x04: Indicates that the port detects a self-loop. 0x05: Indicates other unknown reasons.
Parameter 5
The value is always 0xff.

The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, or the port does not transmit or receive any services.
Possible Causes
l l l l l
Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode. Cause 3: The port fails to receive LACP packets. Cause 4: The port detects a self-loop. Cause 5: other unknown reasons.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause based on the alarm parameter. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. (1) On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. If... Then... Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4. Go to Cause 5.
The port is not enabled Enable the port in the LAG group. The port is enabled Check the link state of each port. If any link is faulty, rectify the fault.
Step 3 Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode.

A Alarm Reference
(1) On the NMS, check the working mode of the port in the LAG group. If the port is in halfduplex mode, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. Step 4 Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. (1) On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end. If... The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured Then... Reconfigure the LAG group. Go to the next step.
(2) Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. Step 5 Cause 4: The port detects a self-loop. (1) Release the self-loop of the port. Step 6 Cause 5: other unknown reasons (1) Contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.24 LOOP_ALM
Description
The LOOP_ALM is an alarm indicating that a loopback event occurs.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the corresponding board.
A-42
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. Parameter 4 Indicates the type of loopback.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
0x00: Indicates optical/electrical port inloop. 0x01: Indicates optical/electrical port outloop. 0x02: Indicates path inloop. 0x03: Indicates path outloop. 0x04: Indicates loopback on the user side. 0x05: Indicates loopback on the combination wave side. 0x06: Indicates SPI inloop. 0x07: Indicates SPI outloop. 0x08: Indicates ATM layer inloop. 0x09: Indicates ATM layer outloop. 0x0A: Indicates PHY layer inloop. 0x0B: Indicates PHY layer outloop. 0x0C: Indicates MAC layer inloop. 0x0D: Indicates MAC layer outloop. 0x0E: Indicates VC-4 timeslot inloop. 0x0F: Indicates VC-4 timeslot outloop. 0x10: Indicates VC-3 timeslot inloop. 0x11: Indicates VC-3 timeslot outloop. 0x12: Indicates VC-12 timeslot inloop. 0x13: Indicates VC-12 timeslot outloop. 0x14: Indicates IF outloop. 0x15: Indicates IF inloop. 0x16: Indicates RF inloop. 0xFF: Indicates any of the preceding loopback modes.

The loopback port or path fails to transmit services.
Possible Causes
Loopback is performed at the local site.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: Loopback is performed at the local site. (1) Determine the type of loopback based on the alarm parameters.
A Alarm Reference
(2) Find out the cause of loopback, and set the loopback status of the port that reports the alarm to Non-Loopback. For more information about the loopback operation, see 7.5 Software loopback. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.25 MSSW_DIFFERENT
Description
The MSSW_DIFFERENT is an alarm indicating that the master and slave software areas mismatches with each other. This alarm occurs when the NE detects that the first software system and the second software system of the system control, cross-connect, and timing board mismatch with each other.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the location of the file.
l l
0x01: Indicates the files in the flash memory 0x02: Indicates the software that is currently running
A-44
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files on the system control board.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwx 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwx 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.ini 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.ini 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.ini 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.ini 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pga 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pga 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pga 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pga 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pga 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pga 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pga 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pga 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwx 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwx 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.ini 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.ini 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pga 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pga 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pga 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pga 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pga 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pga
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-45
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
l
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Indicate the cause of the alarm. 0x04: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single system control board are inconsistent. 0x08: The file versions in the active and standby system control boards are inconsistent, or that the files in the corresponding directories of the active and standby system control boards have different names. 0x0c: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single system control board are inconsistent and the file versions on the active and standby system control boards are also inconsistent.

If the currently running software is lost, the backup software fails to take over. If no NE software exists in the flash memory, the system is unable to restart after power-off or reset.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: An exception occurs during the software loading.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An exception occurs during the software loading. (1) Contact Huawei engineers to re-load the software. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.26 MW_BER_EXC
Description
The MW_BER_EXC is an alarm indicating that there are excessive bit errors on the radio link. This alarm occurs when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
A Alarm Reference
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the corresponding board.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

The services on the port are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is too heavy. Cause 2: The transmit unit at the opposite site is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit at the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is too heavy. (1) Check whether the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported. If so, clear the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit at the local site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU at the local site. Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit unit at the opposite site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU at the opposite site. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.27 MW_BER_SD
Description
The MW_BER_SD is an alarm indicating that signal deteriorates on the radio link. This alarm occurs when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-6 by default) but does not reach the MW_BER_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-47
A Alarm Reference
Attribute
Parameters

The service performance on the port deteriorates. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/ SD protection, HSM channel switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is too heavy. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is too heavy. (1) Check whether the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported. If so, clear the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit at the local site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU at the local site. Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit unit at the opposite site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU at the opposite site. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.28 MW_FEC_UNCOR
A Alarm Reference
Description
The MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm indicates that microwave frames forward error correction (FEC) encoding cannot be corrected.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the corresponding board.

Bit errors occur in the services. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/SD protection, HSM channel protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l l l
Cause 1: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. (1) Check whether the receive power of the ODU at the local site is normal. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying History Transmit Power and Receive Power.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-49
A Alarm Reference
If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity
Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth angle of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.
The RSL is higher than the specified RSL Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps: of the network. The offset value is tens of 1. Check whether any co-channel interference decibles. The duration is from tens of occurs. seconds to several hours a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For details, seeConfiguring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, seeConfiguring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, you can infer that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.
A-50
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
If... The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibles. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours
Then... Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radio link may be faulty in both directions, because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:
l l l l
If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, thus reducing the multipath fading.
l
Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. If the links are in the 1+1 SD configuration, adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna much stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. Increase the fading margin.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite site and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: (1) Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The alarm persists The alarm clears Then... Replace the IDU. Go to the next step.
(2) Check whether the cable connector workmanship meets the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. (3) Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. (4) Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm persists
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Then... Replace the ODU at the opposite site.

A-51
A Alarm Reference
If... The alarm clears
Then... End the alarm handling.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite site and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: (1) Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The alarm persists The alarm clears Then... Replace the IDU. Go to the next step.
(2) Check whether the cable connector workmanship meets the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. (3) Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. (4) Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm persists The alarm clears Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs. (1) Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. b. Mute the opposite ODU. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, you can infer that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. Then... Replace the ODU of the local site. End the alarm handling.
(2) Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs. a. b. c. d. e. Mute the opposite ODU. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Test and record the RSL. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.
f.
(3) Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.

A Alarm Reference
(4) Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.29 MW_LIM
Description
The MW_LIM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched radio link identifier is detected. This alarm occurs when the IDU detects that the link ID in the microwave frame overheads is inconsistent with the specified link ID.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm
Parameters

After reporting the MW_LIM alarm, the IDU inserts the AIS alarm to the received signals. Then, the services on the radio link are interrupted. If the services are configured with SNCP, the protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match the link ID of the opposite site. Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite site. Cause 3: The antenna receives microwave signals from the other site, because the direction of the antenna is set incorrectly.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the IF port that reports the alarm based on the alarm parameters. Step 2 Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match the link ID of the opposite site. (1) Check whether the link ID of the local site matches with the link ID of the opposite site. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, set the link IDs at both ends to the same according to the network planning. Step 3 Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite site. (1) Check whether the receive and transmit frequencies of the local site are consistent with the receive and transmit frequencies of the opposite site. For details, see Configuring the IF/ ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, set the receive and transmit frequencies of the two sites again according to the network planning. Step 4 Cause 3: The antenna receives microwave signals from the other sites, because the direction of the antenna is set incorrectly. (1) Adjust the direction of the antenna and ensure that the antennas at both ends are aligned. ----End
Related Information
The MW_LIM alarm is generated due to the inconsistency between the specified link ID and the received link ID. When the MW_LOF alarm is generated on the link, the received link ID is a random value. In this case, the link ID is invalid. The MW_LIM alarm is also suppressed by the MW_LOF alarm.
A.2.30 MW_LOF
Description
The MW_LOF is an alarm indicating that the Reed Solomon (RS) frame is lost.
Attribute
Parameters
A-54
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning

The services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services, the IF working modes at the local site and the opposite site are different. In the case of Hybrid radio services, the channel bandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite site are different. Cause 3: The working frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the working frequency of the ODU at the opposite site. Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. Cause 7: An interference event occurs.
l l l l
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. (1) Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment at the local site. If yes, take priority to clear them. The relevant alarms are as follows:
l l l l l l l
HARD_BAD VOLT_LOS IF_CABLE_OPEN BD_STATUS RADIO_RSL_LOW CONFIG_NOSUPPORT TEMP_ALARM
Step 2 Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services, the IF working modes at the local site and the opposite site are different. In the case of Hybrid radio services, the channel bandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite site are different. (1) In the case of TDM radio services, check whether the working mode of the IF board at the local site is consistent with the working mode of the IF board at the opposite site. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, reset the working mode of the IF board according to the network planning.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-55
A Alarm Reference
In the case of Hybrid radio services, check whether the channel bandwidth and modulation modes are the same at both ends. If not, change the channel bandwidth and modulation modes according to the network planning. For details, see Setting the Hybrid/AM Attribute. Step 3 Cause 3: The working frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the working frequency of the ODU at the opposite site. (1) Ensure that the type of the ODU at the local site is consistent with the type of the ODU at the opposite site. (2) Reset the working frequency of the ODU according to the network planning. For details, see Setting Parameters of ODU Interfaces. Set the value of the transmit frequency of the local site the same as the value of the receive frequency of the opposite site. Then, set the value of the receive frequency of the local site the same as the value of the transmit frequency of the opposite site. Step 4 Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. (1) Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. If yes, take priority to clear them. The relevant alarms are as follows:
l l l l l l l l
HARD_BAD BD_STATUS VOLT_LOS IF_CABLE_OPEN RADIO_MUTE RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW TEMP_ALARM
(2) Locate the fault by looping back the opposite site. Follow the steps: a. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The alarm persists The alarm clears b. c. d. Then... Replace the IDU. Go to the next step.
Check whether the cable connector workmanship meets the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
Step 5 Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. (1) Locate the fault by looping back the opposite site. Follow the steps:
A Alarm Reference
a.
Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 7.5.2 Setting Loopback for the IF Port. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The alarm persists The alarm clears Then... Replace the IDU. Go to the next step.
b. c. d.
Check whether the cable connector workmanship meets the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
Step 6 Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. (1) Check whether the receive power of the ODU at the local site is abnormal. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see 7.3.7 Browsing the History Performance. If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth angle of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-57
A Alarm Reference
If...
Then...
The RSL is higher than the specified RSL Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps: of the network. The offset value is tens of 1. Check whether any co-channel interference decibles. The duration is from tens of occurs. seconds to several hours a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, you can infer that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibles. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radio link may be faulty in both directions, because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:
l l l l
If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, thus reducing the multipath fading.
l
Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. If the links are in the 1+1 SD configuration, adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna much stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. Increase the fading margin.
A-58
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Step 7 Cause 7: An interference event occurs. Follow the steps: (1) Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. b. Mute the opposite ODU. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, you can infer that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. Mute the opposite ODU. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Test and record the RSL. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.
(2) Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs. a. b. c. d. e.
f.
(3) Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. (4) Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.31 MW_RDI
Description
The MW_RDI alarm indicates that there are defects at the remote end of a radio link. This alarm occurs when the IF board detects an RDI in the radio frame overheads.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
A Alarm Reference
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

If the local site is configured with reverse switching, 1+1 switching on the IF board is triggered when the working and protection boards receive the MW_RDI alarm at the same time. This alarm also indicates that the services received at the opposite site are interrupted.
Possible Causes
After detecting a service alarm that is caused by the fault on a radio link, the receive end returns a radio link fault indication to the transmit end.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: After detecting a service alarm that is caused by the fault on a radio link, the receive end returns a radio link fault indication to the transmit end. (1) Clear the microwave alarms that occur at the opposite site. The possible alarms are as follows:
l l l
MW_LOF R_LOF R_LOC
----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.32 NESF_LOST
Description
The NESF_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE software is lost. This alarm occurs when the system control, cross-connect, and timing board detects that the NE software in the flash memory is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical
A-60
Alarm Type Processing alarm
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the routine inspection object.
l l l
0x01: Indicates an ordinary file 0x02: Indicates the version of the running software 0x03: Indicates a special routine inspection object
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the routine inspection object.

l
0x01, 0x03, 0x05, 0x07, and 0x09 indicate the scc.fpga, nesoft.hwx, ne.ini, ocp.ini, and DSSPCfg.xml in the ofs1, respectively. 0x02, 0x04, 0x06, 0x08, and 0x0A indicate the scc.fpga, nesoft.hwx, ne.ini, ocp.ini, and DSSPCfg.xml in the ofs2, respectively.
Parameter 4
Alarm Cause
l l l
If the first bit is 1, it indicates that the file does not exist. If the second bit is 1, it indicates that verification of the file fails. If the third bit is 1, it indicates that the version of the file in the active area is different from the version of the file in the standby area. If the fourth bit is 1, it indicates that the version of the file of the active board is different from the version of the file in the standby board.

If the NE software does not exist in the active and standby areas, an NE cannot be restarted after it is powered off or reset.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased. Cause 2: Loading the NE software fails. Cause 3: The portable flash memory card is not in position or is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased. Cause 2: Loading the NE software fails.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Check whether the alarm is caused by the loading operation. If... The alarm is caused by the loading operation The alarm is not caused by the loading operation Then... Contact the Huawei engineers to re-load the software. Go to the next step.
Step 2 Cause 3: The portable flash memory card is not in position or is faulty. (1) Re-install or replace the portable flash memory card. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.33 NESTATE_INSTALL
Description
The NESTATE_INSTALL is an alarm indicating that the NE is in the install state.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

The NE fails to work.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The NE database check fails.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The NE database check fails. (1) Restore the data from the backup database. ----End
Related Information
None.
A Alarm Reference
A.2.34 POWER_ALM
Description
The POWER_ALM is a power module alarm indication.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the power module that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by power module 1 of the board. Parameter 2
l l
0x01: under-voltage 0x02: over-voltage

The power module of the IDU 605 that accesses the -48 V/-60 V power supply is under protection. Therefore, if only one power module reports the POWER_ALM alarm, the system is not affected.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The accessed power is abnormal. Cause 2: The power module is abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The accessed power is abnormal. (1) Use a multimeter to test the power voltage supplied to the chassis. If... The voltage is beyond the range of -38.4 V to -72 V The voltage is within the range of -38.4 V to -72 V Step 2 Cause 2: The power module is abnormal.
Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 2.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Replace the IDU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.35 R_LOC
Description
The R_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is lost on the receive line side. This alarm is reported when the line board fails to extract the clock signal from the line signal or the IF board fails to extract the clock signal from the IF signal.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path.

The services on the line port or the IF port are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The receive unit at the local site is faulty. Cause 2: The transmit unit at the opposite site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receive unit at the local site is faulty.
A Alarm Reference
(1) At the local site, perform an inloop on the port of the board that reports the alarm. For details, see 7.5 Software loopback. If... Then...
The alarm persists after the loopback Replace the board that reports the alarm at the local site. The alarm clears after the loopback Go to Cause 2.
(2) Replace the board and then check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the PXC board of the local site.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit at the opposite site is faulty. (1) Replace the board of the opposite site. If... The alarm clears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the PXC board of the opposite site.
Related Information
None.
A.2.36 R_LOF
Description
The R_LOF is an alarm indicating that frames are lost on the receive side. This alarm is reported when the OOF state lasts for 3 ms.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
A Alarm Reference
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the corresponding board.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path.

Services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: Certain other alarms occur. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain high-level alarms occur. (1) Check whether the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported. If... The MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported The MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is not reported Then... Handle the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm immediately. Go to the next step.
(2) Perform an inloop on the IF port that reports the alarm. If... The alarm clears after the inloop is performed The alarm persists after the inloop is performed Then... Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is reported when the transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is reported when the receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. (1) Perform the operation according to the IDU configuration of the opposite site.
l
If the opposite site is configured with the IDU 605, replace the IDU of the opposite site. If the opposite site is configured with the IDU 620 a. Replace the IF board of the opposite site.
A-66
A Alarm Reference
b.
The alarm persists after the IF board is replaced, replace the PXC board of the opposite site.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU of the local site. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.37 R_LOS
Description
The R_LOS is an alarm indicating that the signals received by the tributary on the receive line side or the microwave frames on the receive line side are lost.
Attribute
Parameters
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

Services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: Certain other alarms occur. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
l
Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain high-level alarms occur. (1) Check whether the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported. If... The MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported The MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is not reported Then... Handle the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm immediately. Go to the next step.
(2) Perform an inloop on the IF port that reports the alarm. If... The alarm clears after the inloop is performed The alarm persists after the inloop is performed Then... Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is reported when the transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is reported when the receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite site is faulty. (1) Perform the operation according to the IDU configuration of the opposite site.
l
If the opposite site is configured with the IDU 605, replace the IDU of the opposite site. If the opposite site is configured with the IDU 620 a. b. Replace the IF board of the opposite site. If the alarm persists after the IF board is replaced, replace the PXC board of the opposite site.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU of the local site. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.38 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF
Description
The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is an alarm indicating that the mean receive power of the ODUs are lower than the threshold of the receive power (the threshold value is about the receiver sensitivity plus 14 dB).
A Alarm Reference
When the receive power of the ODUs in consecutive six hours is lower than the threshold, the system reports the alarm. When the mean receive power of the ODUs becomes normal in three minutes after the alarm is reported, the alarm clears.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Meaning The value is always 0x01. The values are always 0xff 0xff. The values are always 0xff 0xff.

If the MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is not generated, services are not affected.
Possible Causes
l l l l
Cause 1: The ODU fault at the transmit end causes abnormal transmit power. Cause 2: The direction of the antenna is deflected. Cause 3: Transmission environment changes. Cause 4: The fading margin in the case of rain and fog in the network planning is insufficient.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ODU fault at the transmit end causes abnormal transmit power. (1) Check whether the ODU at the transmit end reports the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm. If... The ODU at the transmit end reports the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm Then... Handle the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm.
The ODU at the opposite end does not report the Go to Cause 2. RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm Step 2 Cause 2: The direction of the antenna is deflected.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Check whether the direction of the antenna is deflected. If... The direction of the antenna is deflected The direction of the antenna is not deflected Step 3 Cause 3: Transmission environment changes. (1) Check whether the transmission environment changes. For example, check whether any building blocks the transmission and increases the link fading significantly. If... The transmission environment changes The transmission environment does not change Then... Contact the network planning department for replanning the transmission trail. Go to Cause 4. Then... Adjust the direction of the antenna. Go to Cause 3.
Step 4 Cause 4: The fading margin in the case of rain and fog in the network planning is insufficient. (1) If the alarm is reported frequently, contact the network planning department for increasing the fading margin by replanning the transmission trail. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.39 RADIO_MUTE
Description
The RADIO_MUTE is an alarm indicating that the radio transmitter is muted.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1
A-70
Meaning Indicates the RF port that reports the alarm.

A Alarm Reference

The transmitter does not transmit services.
Possible Causes
l l l l
Cause 1: Certain other alarms occur. Cause 2: The transmitter of the local site is muted manually. Cause 3: The IDU is faulty, causing abnormal IF output. Cause 4: The data output is abnormal because the ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain other alarms occur. (1) Check whether the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT or IF_INPWR_ABN alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. Step 2 Cause 2: The transmitter of the local site is muted manually. (1) Check whether the transmitter of the ODU is muted. For details, see Configuring the IF/ ODU Information of a Radio Link. If yes, unmute the ODU. Then, enable the ODU to transmit signals. Step 3 Cause 3: The IDU is faulty, causing abnormal IF output. (1) Replace the IDU. Step 4 Cause 4: The data output is abnormal because the ODU is faulty. (1) 6.2 Replacing an ODU. ----End
Related Information
The number of the logical slot for the ODU is the number of the slot for the IF board connected to the ODU plus 10.
A.2.40 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH
Description
The RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH is an alarm indicating that antennas are not aligned. When the receivable power is set on an NE, the NE enables the antenna alignment indication function automatically. If the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset receive power minus 3 dB, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is reported. Then, if the antennas are aligned for continuous 30 minutes, the antenna alignment indication function is disabled automatically. Afterwards, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is reported only when the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm is reported.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-71
A Alarm Reference
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Meaning The value is always 0x01. The values are always 0xff 0xff. The values are always 0xff 0xff.

If the MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is not generated, services are not affected.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: Antennas are not aligned during the equipment commissioning. Cause 2: The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is reported when the NE is running.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Antennas are not aligned during the equipment commissioning. (1) Align the antennas, and ensure that the actual receive power is within the range of preset receive power +/-3 dB. Step 2 Cause 2: The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is reported when the NE is running. (1) Handle the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm. When the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm clears, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm clears. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.41 RADIO_RSL_HIGH
A Alarm Reference
Description
The RADIO_RSL_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the radio receive power is high. This alarm is reported if the detected receive power is equal to or higher than the upper threshold of the ODU (-20 dBm).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the RF port that reports the alarm.

Normal transmission of services is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty. Cause 2: There is a strong interference source nearby. Cause 3: The transmit power of the opposite ODU is high.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU. Step 2 Cause 2: There is a strong interference source nearby. (1) Check whether any nearby signal source transmits signals whose frequency is close to the specified range. If yes, check whether the signal source can be closed or moved. If not, contact the network planning department for replanning the frequency. Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit power of the opposite ODU is high. (1) Reset the transmit power of the opposite ODU. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. ----End
A Alarm Reference
Related Information
None.
A.2.42 RADIO_RSL_LOW
Description
The RADIO_RSL_LOW is an alarm indicating that the radio receive power is low. This alarm is reported if the detected receive power is equal to or lower than the lower threshold of the ODU (-90 dBm).
Attribute
Parameters

If no MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated, services are not affected.
Possible Causes
l l l l
Cause 1: Certain other alarms occur at the opposite site. Cause 2: The transmit power of the opposite site is low. Cause 3: The local ODU is faulty. Cause 4: Signal attenuation on the radio link is heavy.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain other alarms occur at the opposite site. Check whether any of the following alarms is generated on the equipment of the opposite site. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
l l l
RADIO_MUTE CONFIG_NOSUPPORT RADIO_TSL_LOW

A-74

l
A Alarm Reference
BD_STATUS
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit power of the opposite site is low. (1) Check whether the transmit power of the opposite site is normal. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the transmit power is abnormal, replace the ODU of the opposite site. Step 3 Cause 3: The local ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU of the local site. Step 4 Cause 4: Signal attenuation on the radio link is heavy. (1) Browse history alarms, and check whether the RADIO_RSL_LOW alarm occurs continuously. If the alarm occurs occasionally, contact the network planning department to change the design to improve anti-fading performance. (2) Check whether the antennas at both ends are aligned. If the antennas are not aligned, align the antennas again. (3) Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification to the planning design, therefore avoiding the block of the mountain or building obstacle. (4) Check whether the polarization direction of the antenna, ODU, and hybrid coupler at both ends is set correctly. If not, correct the polarization direction. (5) Check whether the outdoor units such as the antenna, hybrid coupler, ODU, and flexible waveguide are wet, damp, or damaged. If yes, replace the unit that is wet, damp, or damaged. For details, see 6 Part Replacement. (6) Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the requirement. If not, replace the antenna. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.43 RADIO_TSL_HIGH
Description
The RADIO_TSL_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the radio transmit power is high. This alarm is reported if the detected transmit power is higher than the upper power threshold of the ODU.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-75
A Alarm Reference
Attribute
Parameters

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.44 RADIO_TSL_LOW
Description
The RADIO_TSL_LOW is an alarm indicating that the radio transmit power is low. This alarm is reported if the detected transmit power is less than the lower power threshold of the ODU.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical
A-76
Alarm Type Service alarm
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Parameters

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ODU is faulty. (1) Replace the ODU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.45 RELAY_ALARM
Description
The RELAY_ALARM is an alarm indicating relay errors.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Environment alarm
Parameters
A Alarm Reference
Name
Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the input alarm signal. For example, 0x01 indicates that the reported external alarm is from the first input alarm signal.

None.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is an input alarm signal.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is an input alarm signal. (1) Based on the alarm parameter, determine the ID of the input alarm signal. (2) Rectify the fault according the meaning of the input alarm signal. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.46 RP_LOC
Description
The RP_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock of the receive phase-locked loop is lost.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

The services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The service configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The IDU is faulty.
A-78
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The service configuration data is incorrect. (1) Check whether the service is correctly configured. If... The service is configured incorrectly The service is configured correctly Step 2 Cause 2: The IDU is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU. ----End Then... Reconfigure the service. Go to Cause 2.
Related Information
None.
A.2.47 RPS_INDI
Description
The RPS_INDI is a radio protection switching alarm indication.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the protection group. Indicates the type of protection switching. 0x01: HSB protection switching 0x02: HSM protection switching
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-79
A Alarm Reference

During the HSB protection switching, services are interrupted. After the HSB switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. During the HSM protection switching, no bit errors occur and services are not affected.
Possible Causes
l
The possible causes of the HSB protection switching are as follows:

Cause 1: An external switching event occurs. Cause 2: An automatic switching event occurs. Cause 3: A reverse switching event occurs.
Possible cause of the HSM protection switching: At the local site, the radio link in the receive direction is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the type of the protection switching based on the alarm parameter. Step 2 Cause 1 of HSB switching: An external switching event occurs. That is, a command is issued on the NMS to trigger the switching. (1) Check whether the switching is the forced switching or manual switching. For details, see Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status. If... Then...
The switching is the forced switching or Find the cause and clear the switching manual switching immediately. The switching is not the forced switching or manual switching Go to Cause 2 of HSB switching.
Step 3 Cause 2 of HSB switching: An automatic switching event occurs. That is, the equipment is faulty, or the service is defective. (1) Check whether the following faults or alarms occur. If yes, rectify the faults or clear the alarms.
l l l l l
Hardware fault on the IDU, or hardware fault on the ODU POWER_ALM or VOLT_LOS RADIO_TSL_HIGH, RADIO_TSL_LOW, or RADIO_RSL_HIGH IF_INPWR_ABN or CONFIG_NOSUPPORT R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, or MW_LOF
NOTE
If the switching is non-revertive, the services are not automatically switched back to the working path when the working path is restored to normal, and the RPS_INDI alarm persists. In this case, you need to manually switch the services from the protection path to the working path. The RPS_INDI alarm clears only when the switching is successful. If the switching is revertive, the services are automatically switched back to the working path when the specified wait-to-restore (WTR) time expires after the working path is restored to normal. The RPS_INDI alarm clears only when the switching is successful.
A-80
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
Step 4 Cause 3 of HSB switching: A reverse switching event occurs. (1) Check whether the active and standby IF ports report the MW_RDI alarm. If yes, clear the MW_RDI alarm immediately. Step 5 Cause of the HSM switching: The radio link is faulty. (1) Check whether any alarm that triggers HSM switching is generated on the IF port in the IF 1+1 protection group. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. HSM switching may be triggered by any of the following alarms:
l l
R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, or MW_LOF MW_FEC_UNCOR
----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.48 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT
Description
The SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating that the commit operation is not performed during software package loading. During simulation package diffusion, the system reports the alarm if the commit operation is not performed within 30 minutes after activation of the NE software.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

If an NE fails to perform the commit operation for a long period, the software in the two areas of the NE is inconsistent.
Possible Causes
Certain radio links are faulty. As a result, the NE involved in the simulation package diffusion fails to receive the commit command.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: Certain radio links are faulty. As a result, the NE involved in the simulation package diffusion fails to receive the commit command.
A Alarm Reference
(1) Check whether any radio link is faulty. If... Then...
Certain radio links are faulty Rectify the faults on the radio links and ensure that the links between the nodes on which the software package is loaded are normal. Radio links are normal Perform simulation package diffusion for the NEs that fail to be upgraded through simulation package diffusion.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.49 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH
Description
The SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH is an alarm indicating that the automatic match function is disabled. When the automatic match function of the service logical board is disabled, the system reports the alarm if the service logical board cannot find out the mapping software from the software on the SCC board.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

If the service logical board fails to find out the mapping software from the software on the SCC board, the software versions of the entire NE are inconsistent. As a result, certain functions of the NE cannot run normally.
Possible Causes
The automatic match function is disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The automatic match function is disabled. (1) Contact Huawei technical support engineers for troubleshooting. ----End
A Alarm Reference
Related Information
None.
A.2.50 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL
Description
The SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the commit operation on an NE fails. This alarm is reported when the commit operation fails in simulation package diffusion.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

When the SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL alarm occurs, the software versions in the two areas of the double-area board are inconsistent.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The loaded software package is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The loaded software package is incorrect. (1) Check whether the loaded software package is correct. (2) Perform simulation package diffusion again for the NE that reports the SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL alarm. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.51 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH
Description
The SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH is an alarm indicating that the board software version and the version of the running software are inconsistent. This alarm is reported when the system detects that the software version of any online board is inconsistent with the version of the running software after the SCC board is replaced.
A Alarm Reference
Attribute
Parameters
None.

When the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported, certain functions of the NE may be affected because the board software version is inconsistent with the version of the running software.
Possible Causes
The software package of the SCC board does not match the software version of the board after the SCC board is replaced. In this case, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The software package of the SCC board does not match the software version of the board after the SCC board is replaced. In this case, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported. (1) Perform simulation package diffusion again for the NE that reports the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.52 SWDL_INPROCESS
Description
The SWDL_INPROCESS is an alarm indicating that the simulation package diffusion is in process on the NE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
A Alarm Reference

When the software package is being loaded to an NE, the operations, such as modifying configuration, uploading/downloading files, and backing up the database, are not allowed.
Possible Causes
Cause: The simulation package diffusion is being performed on the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The simulation package diffusion is being performed on the NE. (1) The SWDL_INPROCESS alarm clears automatically after the loading or rollback is complete. Hence, this alarm does not require handling. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.53 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK
Description
The SWDL_NEPKGCHECK is an alarm indicating that a certain file of the package stored in the flash memory of the NE is lost. During the routine inspection on the flash memory in the double areas of the SCC board, the NE software detects that a certain file of the package in one area is missing or cannot be verified. If the corresponding file in the other area is normal, the NE software recovers the missing or faulty file with the normal one. This alarm is reported when the file is found missing and cannot be recovered at the end of the routine inspection. This alarm clears when the file is recovered in the next routine inspection.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

A certain file of the package is missing and the NE may malfunction.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: A certain file is missing and cannot be recovered.
A Alarm Reference
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain file is missing and cannot be recovered. (1) Ensure that the loaded software package is correct. Perform simulation package diffusion again for the NE that reports the SWDL_NEPKGCHECK alarm. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.54 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
Description
The SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT is an alarm indicating that certain board software is missing in the software package. This alarm is reported when the required software is missing in the software package during the automatic match of the board.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

The board cannot perform automatic match, because the required board software is missing in the software package. Therefore, the board software version is inconsistent with the NE software version, and certain functions of the NE may be affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain board software is not loaded during software package loading.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain board software is not loaded during software package loading. (1) Add the required board software to the software package, Alternatively, perform software package loading again. ----End
Related Information
None.
A Alarm Reference
A.2.55 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL
Description
The SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL is an alarm indicating that an NE rollback fails. If a board rollback fails when the NE rollback is being performed, this alarm is reported.
Attribute
Parameters
None.

The board software version fails to match the NE software version, and therefore certain functions of the NE may be affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain board software is not loaded during software package loading.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain board software is not loaded during software package loading. (1) Add the required board software to the software package, Alternatively, perform software package loading again. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.56 T_ALOS
Description
The T_ALOS is an alarm indicating that analog signals are lost at the 2 Mbit/s interface.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Alarm Type Communication alarm
A-87
A Alarm Reference
Parameters

2 Mbit/s services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l l l l
Cause 1: The interface does not access 2 Mbit/s services. Cause 2: The opposite equipment is faulty. Cause 3: The trunk cable is faulty. Cause 4: The board that reports the alarm is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The interface does not access 2 Mbit/s services. (1) Check whether the interface accesses 2 Mbit/s services. If... Then...
The interface does not access services Enable the port to access services or delete unnecessary services. The interface accesses services Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite equipment is faulty. (1) Check whether the opposite equipment is faulty. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment runs normally Step 3 Cause 3: The trunk cable is faulty. (1) Check whether the trunk cable is faulty. If... The trunk cable is faulty
A-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Go to Cause 2.
Then... Rectify the fault. Go to Cause 3.
Then... Rectify the fault.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
If... The trunk cable is in normal status Step 4 Cause 4: The board that reports the alarm is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU. ----End
Then... Go to Cause 4.
Related Information
None.
A.2.57 TEMP_ALARM
Description
The TEMP_ALARM alarm indicates that the board temperature crosses the threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Environment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning
l l
0x01: The temperature crosses the upper threshold. 0x02: The temperature crosses the lower threshold.

The board fails to work normally.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The board temperature crosses the threshold. Cause 2: The temperature detection circuit of the board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board temperature crosses the threshold.
A Alarm Reference
(1) If the alarm is reported by the ODU, take appropriate measures (for example, installing a sunshade) to control the temperature. (2) If the alarm is reported by the IDU, check whether the temperature control devices, such as air-conditioners, operate normally. If... The temperature control devices malfunction The temperature control devices work normally Then... Adjust the temperature control devices. Go to the next step.
(3) Check whether the heat dissipation hole on the IDU is covered or blocked. If... The heat dissipation hole is covered or blocked The heat dissipation hole is not covered or blocked Then... Clear or remove the covering materials or obstacles. Go to the next step.
(4) Check whether 1U space is reserved above and below the IDU for natural heat dissipation. If... The heat dissipation space does not meet the requirement The heat dissipation space meets the requirement Then... Change the position of the IDU and reserve a sufficient space for heat dissipation. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when the temperature detection circuit of a board is faulty.
Step 2 Cause 2: The temperature detection circuit of the board is faulty. (1) If the ambient temperature is normal and no heat dissipation problem exists, replace the IDU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.58 UP_E1_AIS
Description
The UP_E1_AIS is an alarm indication of the 2 Mbit/s uplink signal. This alarm is reported when the tributary board detects that the 2 Mbit/s uplink signal is all 1s.
A Alarm Reference
Attribute
Parameters

E1 signals are unavailable.
Possible Causes
l l
Cause 1: The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal. Cause 2: The receive unit of the tributary unit at the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal. (1) Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal. If... The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal The opposite equipment does not transmit the AIS signal Then... Rectify the fault on the opposite equipment. Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the tributary unit at the local site is faulty. (1) Replace the IDU. ----End
Related Information
None.
A.2.59 VOLT_LOS
A Alarm Reference
Description
The VOLT_LOS is an alarm indicating that the power voltage is unavailable.
Attribute
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the power that reports the alarm.
l l l l l
0x01: -48 V/+24 V power output 0x02: -48 V/+24 V power input 0x03: +5 V power output 0x04: +3.3 V power output 0x05: lightning

l
If the alarm is reported by the PW48A/PW48B/PW24A board, the power module that reports the alarm fail to work. If the system is not configured with a protection power module, the system fails to work normally. If the alarm is reported by the IF board, the ODU connected to the IF board fails to work.
Possible Causes
l l l
Cause 1: The output power is abnormal. Cause 2: The input power is abnormal. Cause 3: Lightning occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the type of the power supply that reports the alarm based on the alarm parameter. Step 2 Cause 1: The output power is abnormal. (1) Clear the alarm according to the type of the power supply that reports the alarm. If... The alarm is reported by the PW48A/PW48B/PW24A board
A-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Then... Replace the IDU.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A Alarm Reference
If... The alarm is reported by the IF board (2) Check the power switch of the ODU. If... The power switch is turned off The power switch is turned on Then...
Then... Go to the next step.
Turn on the power switch. Go to the next step.
(3) Check the IF fiber jumper, IF cable, or ODU section by section for a short circuit. If... A short circuit exists Then... Replace the short-circuited component, and then replace the IDU.
No short circuit exists Replace the IDU.
CAUTION
If the alarm is caused by a short circuit, replace the short-circuited cable or ODU, and then replace the IDU. Otherwise, the new IDU may be damaged. Step 3 Cause 2: The input power is abnormal. (1) Clear the alarm according to the type of the power supply that reports the alarm. If... The alarm is reported by the IDU The alarm is reported by the power board (2) Check the power switch. If... Then... Then... Replace the IDU. Go to the next step.
The power switch is turned off Turn on the power switch. The power switch is turned on Contact the engineers for power supply to rectify the fault. Step 4 Cause 3: Lightning occurs. (1) Contact the engineers for power supply to check the grounding lightning facilities. ----End
Related Information
None.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
A-93
B Abnormal Event Reference
Abnormal Event Reference
An abnormal event is an important indicator when a fault occurs on the equipment. This topic describes all the possible important abnormal events of the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these events. B.1 Important Abnormal Events Important abnormal events include protection switching events and RMON alarms. B.2 Important Abnormal Events and Handling Procedures This topic describes all the important abnormal performance events of the OptiX RTN 605 in alphabetic order and how to handle these events.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
B-1
B.1 Important Abnormal Events

Important abnormal events include protection switching events and RMON alarms. Table B-1 Important abnormal events Event Name IF 1+1 Protection Switching RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit IFH1 and IF0 EMS4 EMS4 Source
NOTE
All alarmed boards refer to the logical boards that are displayed on the NMS.
B.2 Important Abnormal Events and Handling Procedures

This topic describes all the important abnormal performance events of the OptiX RTN 605 in alphabetic order and how to handle these events. B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching B.2.2 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit B.2.3 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit
B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching

Description
This abnormal event indicates that 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, or 1+1 SD switching occurs on the equipment.
Attribute
Severity Major Type Service
B-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Parameters
Name Protection Group ID Slot ID of Working Board Current Working Board Meaning Indicates the ID of the protection group where an IF 1+1 protection switching occurs. Indicates the slot ID of the current working board. Indicates the current working board.
l l
0: main board 1: standby board
Main Board State
Indicates the current state of the main board.

l l l
Normal Failed MW_RDI
Standby Board State
Indicates the current state of the standby board.

l l l
Normal Failed MW_RDI
Switching Request Type
Indicates the type of an IF 1+1 protection switching request.

l l l l l l l
No request Automatic switching Manual switching Forced switching Lockout of switching Wait-to-restore RDI switching
Impact on System
l
During HSB protection switching, the services are interrupted. After the switching is completed, the services are restored to normal. During HSM protection switching, no bit errors occur and the services are not affected. When the AM function is enabled, the protection path works in modulation mode for ensuring capacity after HSM switching is completed. Hence, the services of lower priorities are impaired.
Relevant Alarms
When IF 1+1 protection switching occurs, the RPS_INDI alarm is reported.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-3
Possible Causes
l
The possible causes of the HSB protection switching are as follows:

The hardware of the ODU or IF unit at the local end is faulty. The working path at the local end receives the MW_RDI alarm. An external switching, which is triggered by the switching command that is issued from the NMS software, occurs. The external switching includes lockout of switching, forced switching, and manual switching. The radio link in the receive direction of the local end is faulty. An external switching, which is triggered by the switching command that is issued from the NMS software, occurs. The external switching includes lockout of switching, forced switching, and manual switching.
The possible causes of HSM protection switching are as follows:

Procedure
Step 1 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type indicated by the parameter and the description in RPS_INDI. ----End
B.2.2 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit

Description
This abnormal event indicates that the current RMON performance value is lower than the preset lower limit.
Attribute
Parameters
Name Performance ID Current Performance Value Lower Limit Meaning Indicates the ID of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the value of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the lower limit of the current RMON performance event.
B-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Impact on System
Different abnormal performance events have different impacts on the system. For details, see List of RMON Alarm Entries.
Relevant Alarms
Different alarms are reported when different RMON performance values are lower than the lower limits. For details, see D.3 RMON Alarm Clearance Reference.
Possible Causes
The lower limit of a performance event is set to a non-zero value.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the lower limit of the performance event to zero. ----End
B.2.3 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit

Description
This abnormal event indicates that the current RMON performance value is higher than the preset upper limit.
Attribute
Parameters
Name Performance ID Current Performance Value Upper Limit Meaning Indicates the ID of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the value of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the upper limit of the current RMON performance event.
Impact on System
Different abnormal performance events have different impacts on the system. For details, see List of RMON Alarm Entries.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-5
Relevant Alarms
Different alarms are reported when different RMON performance values are higher than the upper limits. For details, see D.3 RMON Alarm Clearance Reference.
Possible Causes
When the performance values of different abnormal RMON performance events are higher than the upper limits, the causes are different from each other. For details, see D RMON Event Reference.
Procedure
Step 1 See D.3 RMON Alarm Clearance Reference to handle different abnormal performance events. ----End
B-6
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
C Performance Event Reference
Performance Event Reference
Performance events are important indicators when the equipment performance changes. This topic describes all the possible performance events on the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these performance events. C.1 Performance Event List Performance events are categorized on the basis of the performance event type, and include all the events of the OptiX RTN 605. C.2 Performance Events and Handling Procedures Based on the type of a performance event, this topic describes all the performance events on the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these performance events.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
C-1
C.1 Performance Event List

Performance events are categorized on the basis of the performance event type, and include all the events of the OptiX RTN 605. C.1.1 Microwave Performance Events Microwave performance events include the performance events regarding the microwave power, FEC, and radio link bit errors. C.1.2 Other Performance Events In addition to the SDH and microwave performance events, the OptiX RTN 605 supports performance events regarding the temperature.
C.1.1 Microwave Performance Events

Microwave performance events include the performance events regarding the microwave power, FEC, and radio link bit errors. Table C-1 Microwave power performance events Event Name TSL_MAX TSL_MIN TSL_CUR TSL_AVG RSL_MAX RSL_MIN RSL_CUR RSL_AVG TLHTT Description Indicates the maximum radio transmit signal level. Indicates the minimum radio transmit signal level. Indicates the current radio transmit signal level. Indicates the average radio transmit signal level. Indicates the maximum radio received signal level. Indicates the minimum radio received signal level. Indicates the current radio received signal level. Indicates the average radio received signal level. Indicates the duration when the transmit power is higher than the upper threshold. Indicates the duration when the transmit power is higher than the lower threshold. Source ODU
TLLTT
C-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Event Name RLHTT
Description Indicates the duration when the receive power is lower than the upper threshold. Indicates the duration when the receive power is lower than the lower threshold.
Source
RLLTT
Table C-2 FEC performance events Event Name FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT Description Indicates the BER before the FEC is performed. Indicates the number of bytes that are corrected through the FEC. Indicates the number of frames that cannot be corrected through the FEC. Source IF0 and IFH1 IF0
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_C NT
IFH1
Table C-3 Performance events regarding radio link bit errors Event Name IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_UAS IF_CSES Description Indicates the radio link background block error. Indicates the radio link errored second. Indicates the radio link severely errored second. Indicates the radio link unavailable second. Indicates the radio link consecutively severely errored second. Source IF0 and IFH1
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
C-3
Table C-4 ATPC performance events Event Name ATPC_P_ADJUST ATPC_N_ADJUST Description Indicates the positive ATPC adjustment event. Indicates the negative ATPC adjustment event. Source ODU
Table C-5 AM performance events Event Name QPSKWS QAMWS16 Description Indicates the working duration of the QPSK mode. Indicates the working duration of the 16QAM mode. Indicates the working duration of the 32QAM mode. Indicates the working duration of the 64QAM mode. Indicates the working duration of the 128QAM mode. Indicates the working duration of the 256QAM mode. Source IFH1
QAMWS32
QAMWS64
QAMWS128
QAMWS256
NOTE
C.1.2 Other Performance Events

In addition to the SDH and microwave performance events, the OptiX RTN 605 supports performance events regarding the temperature. Table C-6 Performance events regarding board temperature Event Name BDTEMPMAX Description Indicates the maximum board temperature. Source ODU, and SCC
C-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Event Name BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR
Description Indicates the minimum board temperature. Indicates the current board temperature.
Source
NOTE
C.2 Performance Events and Handling Procedures

Based on the type of a performance event, this topic describes all the performance events on the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these performance events.
C.2.1 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST

Description
l
ATPC_P_ADJUST indicates the positive ATPC adjustment event. This performance event indicates that the quality of a communications link degrades. Therefore, you must increase the transmit power of the ODU to maintain the communication quality.
ATPC_N_ADJUST indicates the negative ATPC adjustment event. This performance event indicates that the quality of a communication link becomes well or the transmit power of the ODU is very large. Therefore, you can decrease the transmit power of the ODU.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description ATPCPADJUST (ATPC_P_ADJUST) and ATPCNADJUST (ATPC_N_ADJUST) None
Impact on System
The ATPC adjustment indicates only the stability of a communication link and it does not affect services. When the value of the performance event is larger, more adjustments are made. When the factors that affect a communication link, such as sudden change of the weather, do not exist, and when the ATPC adjustment count is very large, the communication link may be faulty. You must check the communication link to prevent it from failure.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-5
Relevant Alarms
None.
C.2.2 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS

Description
l
IF_BBE indicates the radio link background block error. A BBE refers to the errored block excluding the errored block in the unavailable and severely errored second.
IF_ES indicates the radio link errored second. An ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. IF_SES indicates the radio link severely errored second. An SES refers to a certain second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks are detected or at least one serious disturbance period (SDP) exists. The SDP refers to a period of at least four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (whichever longer) in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
IF_CSES indicates the radio link consecutively severely errored second. A CSES refers to a second in which an SES event occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds.
IF_UAS indicates the radio link unavailable second. A UAS period is counted from the first second of 10 consecutive SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be a part of the unavailable time. A new available second period starts from the first second of ten consecutive non-SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be a part of the available time.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description IFCNT Block (IFBBE) Second (IFES, IFSES, IFCSES, and IFUAS)
Impact on System
A small number of bit errors do not affect the services. In the case of excessive bit errors, however, the services are interrupted. Generally, the BER is less than 10-3 in the case of voice services, and 10-6 in the case of data services.
Relevant Alarms
the MW_BER_SD or MW_BER_EXC alarm is reported when the BER exceeds the specified threshold.
C-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Possible Causes
The system detects bit errors on the radio link through the bit error detection overheads in the overheads of a microwave frame.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If... Then...
The MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is See 5.3 Troubleshooting Radio Links. reported The MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is Replace the IDU. not reported ----End
C.2.3 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG

Description
l l l l
TSL_MAX indicates the maximum radio transmit signal level. TSL_MIN indicates the minimum radio transmit signal level. TSL_CUR indicates the current radio transmit signal level. TSL_AVG indicates the average radio transmit signal level.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description TSL dBm
Impact on System
When the radio transmit signal level is very low or very high, the radio received signal level at the opposite site is very low or very high. As a result, bit errors occur and even services are interrupted.
Related Alarms
If the radio transmit signal level is beyond the range supported by the ODU, the RADIO_TSL_HIGH or RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm is reported.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
C-7
C.2.4 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG

Description
l l l l
RSL_MAX indicates the maximum radio received signal level. RSL_MAX indicates the minimum radio received signal level. RSL_CUR indicates the current radio received signal level. RSL_AVG indicates the average radio received signal level.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description RSL dBm
Impact on System
When the radio received signal level is very low or very high, bit errors occur and even services are interrupted.
Relevant Alarms
If the radio received signal level exceeds the specified threshold, the RADIO_RSL_HIGH or RADIO_RSL_LOW alarm is reported.
C.2.5 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, and TLLTT

Description
l
RLHTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the upper threshold. RLLTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the lower threshold. TLHTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the upper threshold. TLLTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the lower threshold.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description RLHTS, RLLTS, TLHTS, and TLLTS Second
C-8
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Impact on System
None.
Relevant Alarms
None.
C.2.6 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT, and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT

Description
l
FEC_BEF_COR_ER indicates the BER before the FEC is performed. This event indicates the impact of the external environment on the transmission. FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT indicates the number of bytes corrected through the FEC. This event indicates the impact of the FEC. FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CN indicates the number of frames that cannot be corrected through the FEC. This event indicates the number of error blocks after the FEC is performed.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description FECBEFCORER (FEC_BEF_COR_ER), FECUNCORBLOCKCNT (FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT), and FECUNCORBLOCKCNT (FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT) None (FEC_BEF_COR_ER) None (FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT) Block (FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT)
Unit
Impact on System
If the value of FEC_BEF_COR is very high, residual bit errors are generated after the FEC is performed. If the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT is not zero, bit errors that cannot be corrected are generated on a radio link, and bit errors are generated in the service accordingly.
Relevant Alarms
If a byte cannot be corrected, the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
C-9
C.2.7 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, and QAMWS256

Description
l l l l l l
QPSKWS indicates the working duration of the QPSK mode. QAMWS16 indicates the working time of the 16QAM mode. QAMWS32 indicates the working time of the 32QAM mode. QAMWS64 indicates the working time of the 64QAM mode. QAMWS128 indicates the working time of the 128QAM mode. QAMWS256 indicates the working time of the 256QAM mode.
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description QPSKWSSECOND (QPSKWS) QAMWS16SECOND (QAMWS16) QAMWS32SECOND (QAMWS32) QAMWS64SECOND (QAMWS64) QAMWS128SECOND (QAMWS128) QAMWS256SECOND (QAMWS256) Unit Second
Impact on System
When the AM function is not enabled, the performance event does not affect the system. When the AM function is enabled, in normal cases, the seconds of the modulation mode for ensuring capacity account for a larger percentage. In the duration set for good weather, if the seconds of the low-efficiency modulation mode account for a larger percentage, the performance of the radio link is abnormal.
Relevant Alarms
None.
C.2.8 BDTMPMAX, BDTMPMIN, and BDTMPCUR

Description
l l l
BDTEMPMAX indicates the maximum temperature of a board. BDTEMPMIN indicates the minimum temperature of a board. BDTEMPCUR indicates the current temperature of a board.
C-10
Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description None. C
Impact on System
If the temperature of a board is very high or very low, the performance of the board degrades, and bit errors or other faults occur.
Relevant Alarms
If the temperature of a board exceeds the specified threshold, the TEMP_ALARM alarm is reported.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
C-11
D RMON Event Reference
RMON Event Reference
RMON events reflect the running status of the Ethernet services. This topic describes all the possible RMON events on the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these events. D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries RMON alarm entries refer to the table entries in the RMON alarm group. D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries RMON performance entries refer to the table entries in the RMON statistics group or history group. D.3 RMON Alarm Clearance Reference This topic describes the RMON events of the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these events.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
D-1
D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries

RMON alarm entries refer to the table entries in the RMON alarm group. Table D-1 List of RMON alarm entries Alarm Name UndersizePkts OversizePkts Fragments Jabbers FCSErrors Description Number of undersized packets exceeding the threshold Number of oversized packets exceeding the threshold Number of fragment packets exceeding the threshold Number of jabber packets exceeding the threshold Number of packets with FCS errors exceeding the threshold Source EMS4, EM4T
D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries

RMON performance entries refer to the table entries in the RMON statistics group or history group. Table D-2 List of RMON performance entries Category of Performa nce Entries Basic performanc e Name of a Performance Entry Source
Packets received (64 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (65-127 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (128-255 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (256-511 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (512-1023 bytes in length) (packets)
EMS4, EM4T
D-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
Category of Performa nce Entries
Name of a Performance Entry
Source
Packets received (1024-1518 bytes in length) (packets) Multicast packets received (packets) Broadcast packets received (packets) Undersized packets received (packets) Oversized packets received (packets) Packets received (packets) Fragments received (packets) Oversized error packets received (packets) Extended performanc e Unicast packets transmitted (packets) Pause frames received (frames) Pause frames transmitted (frames) FCS error frames (frames) Packets transmitted (packets) Unicast packets received (packets) Multicast packets transmitted (packets) Broadcast packets transmitted (packets) Rate of good full-frame bytes received (bytes/second) Rate of good full-frame bytes transmitted (bytes/second) Good full-frame bytes received (bytes) Good full-frame bytes transmitted (bytes) EMS4, EM4T
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 605 1E/2E/1F/2F PORT and IFUP support basic performance and extended performance.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
D-3
D.3 RMON Alarm Clearance Reference

This topic describes the RMON events of the OptiX RTN 605 and how to handle these events. D.3.1 UndersizePkts D.3.2 OversizePkts D.3.3 Fragments D.3.4 Jabbers D.3.5 FCSErrors
D.3.1 UndersizePkts
Description
UndersizePkts indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of packets that are shorter than 64 bytes and are received on the line side crosses the preset threshold.
Impact on System
The data frames whose length is beyond the specific range are discarded. As a result, the system services are affected.
Possible Causes
1. 2. The length of a data frame that is received by the board is shorter than 64 bytes. The hardware of a local board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite equipment transmits a packet that is shorter than 64 bytes. If... The opposite equipment transmits a packet that is shorter than 64 bytes Then... Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
The opposite end does not transmit a packet that is Go to the next step. shorter than 64 bytes Step 2 Replace the IDU. ----End
Relevant Information
l
The length range of the data frames that are processed by each type of board is different. The length of the data frames transmitted by the opposite end is within the normal range,
D-4
but it may be beyond the length range of the data frames that can be processed by the local end.
l
Undersized frames may be relevant to services. The opposite equipment may change the length of data frames by an operation such as encapsulation. As a result, a downstream node considers the data frames as undersized frames.
D.3.2 OversizePkts
Description
OversizePkts indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of packets that are longer than the MTU specified for the port and are received on the line side crosses the preset threshold.
Impact on System
If the length of a data frame received at a port is longer than the preset maximum frame length, the data frame is discarded and thus the system services are affected.
Possible Causes
1. 2. The length of an oversized frame configured for a board is shorter than the length of a frame that is received by the board. The hardware of the local board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite equipment transmits a frame that is longer than the maximum frame of the local equipment. If... Then...
The opposite equipment transmits a frame Notify the opposite equipment that the length that is longer than the maximum frame of transmitted frames is changed. length set for the local equipment The opposite equipment does not transmit Go to the next step. a frame that is longer than the maximum frame length set for the local equipment Step 2 Replace the IDU. ----End
l
The length range of the data frames that are processed by each type of board is different. The length of the data frames transmitted by the opposite end is within the normal range, but it may be beyond the length range of the data frames that can be processed by the local end. Oversized frames may be relevant to services. The opposite equipment may change the length of data frames by an operation such as encapsulation. As a result, a downstream node considers the data frames as oversized frames.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. D-5
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
D.3.3 Fragments
Description
Fragments indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of received packets that are shorter than 64 bytes and have FCS or alignment errors exceeds the specified upper threshold.
Impact on System
Data transmission is delayed or packet loss occurs.
Possible Causes
l
The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are different from each other. The hardware of the local board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are the same. If... The working modes are the same The working modes are different from each other Then... Go to the next step. Change the working mode of the port on the local equipment to ensure that the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are the same.
Step 2 Replace the IDU. For details, see 6.1 Replacing the IDU. ----End
D.3.4 Jabbers
Description
Jabbers indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the received packets are longer than 1518 bytes and have FCS or alignment errors.
Impact on System
Data transmission is delayed or packet loss occurs.
Possible Causes
l
The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are different from each other. The hardware of the local IDU is faulty.
D-6
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are the same. If... The working modes are the same The working modes are different from each other Then... Go to the next step. Change the working mode of the port on the local equipment to ensure that the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are the same.
Step 2 Replace the IDU. For details, see 6.1 Replacing the IDU. ----End
D.3.5 FCSErrors
Description
FCSErrors indicates that the number of Ethernet data frames that contain FCS check errors (excluding the oversized and undersized frames) and are received by the local end exceeds the specified threshold. FCSErrors includes FCSErrOv and FCSErrUd. FCSErrOv indicates that the number of Ethernet data frames that contain FCS check errors is higher than the upper threshold, and FCSErrUd indicates the number of Ethernet data frames that contain FCS check errors is lower than the lower threshold.
Impact on System
Most boards discard the packets of FCS check errors. The system services are interrupted in the worst case.
Possible Causes
l
The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are different from each other. For example, the port at one end works in half-duplex mode, and the port at the other end works in half-duplex mode. The transmission line is of the poor quality and bit errors exist. The hardware of the local IDU is faulty.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Rectify the fault based on the alarm parameters. If... The FCSErrUd performance event occurs The FCSErrOv performance event occurs Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.
Step 2 If the FCSErrOv performance event occurs, on the NMS, check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are the same.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. D-7
If...
Then...
The ports on the equipment at both ends are Change the working modes of the ports on the different from each other equipment at both ends to ensure that they are the same. The ports on the equipment at both ends are Go to the next step. the same Step 3 Replace the IDU. For details, see 6.1 Replacing the IDU. ----End
All the RMON performance events are threshold-crossing events. That is, you can check whether the count of RMON performance events in a sampling period exceeds the specified threshold. You can set the sampling period, which is defaulted to 10 seconds.
D-8
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
E Alarm Management
Alarm Management
Alarm management of the OptiX RTN 605 is classified into NE alarm management and board alarm management. E.1 NE Alarm Management The NE alarm management function set by a user is applicable to all the boards on an NE. E.2 Board Alarm Management The board alarm management function is valid for only a board on which a user configures this function.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
E-1
E Alarm Management
E.1 NE Alarm Management

The NE alarm management function set by a user is applicable to all the boards on an NE. The NE alarm management function of the OptiX RTN 605 includes:
l l l
Sets the method for saving an alarm. Sets the delay of an alarm. Sets the reversion mode of an alarm.
For details about these functions, see the manuals or online Help of the NMS.
E.2 Board Alarm Management

The board alarm management function is valid for only a board on which a user configures this function. E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity Alarms are classified into four severity levels: critical, major, minor, and warning. The maintenance personnel can change the alarm severity by using the NMS. E.2.2 Alarm Suppression A board detects only the alarms whose Alarm Monitoring is set to Yes. If the alarms need not be monitored, the maintenance personnel can set alarm suppression. E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Reported, all the detected alarms are reported immediately to the NMS. If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Not Report, the alarms are reported only when alarm query is performed on the NMS. The maintenance personnel can change the setting as required on the NMS. E.2.4 Alarm Reversion If a port is not configured with a service, certain alarms may be reported. To filter the alarms that are not concerned, set these alarms to be reversed. In this manner, the alarm status at this port is contrary to the actual status. That is, the status is displayed to be normal when an alarm is actually reported. E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold When the number of bit errors detected by a board exceeds a specified value, the board generates a bit error alarm. This specified value is the bit error alarm threshold, and the setting of this threshold is supported by all the bit error threshold-crossing and degrading alarms on the OptiX RTN 605.
E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity

Alarms are classified into four severity levels: critical, major, minor, and warning. The maintenance personnel can change the alarm severity by using the NMS. This function is supported by all the boards.
E-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
E Alarm Management
E.2.2 Alarm Suppression

A board detects only the alarms whose Alarm Monitoring is set to Yes. If the alarms need not be monitored, the maintenance personnel can set alarm suppression. This function is supported by all the boards.
E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report

If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Reported, all the detected alarms are reported immediately to the NMS. If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Not Report, the alarms are reported only when alarm query is performed on the NMS. The maintenance personnel can change the setting as required on the NMS. This function is supported by all the boards.
E.2.4 Alarm Reversion

If a port is not configured with a service, certain alarms may be reported. To filter the alarms that are not concerned, set these alarms to be reversed. In this manner, the alarm status at this port is contrary to the actual status. That is, the status is displayed to be normal when an alarm is actually reported. The alarm reversion function is available in three modes, namely, non-revertive, automatic reversion, and manual reversion.
l
Non-revertive In this mode, the alarms are monitored by default and alarm reversion cannot be enabled for a port.
Auto reversion In this mode, alarm reversion can be enabled for a port where alarms are reported. After alarm reversion is enabled at a port, alarms are not reported. When the current alarm is cleared, the alarm reversion changes automatically to the disabled status. That is, the alarm reversion changes to the non-revertive mode. Then, the alarm reporting status at the port is the same as the actual status.
Manual reversion In this mode, alarm reversion can be enabled for a port regardless of whether any alarms are reported at the port. After alarm reversion is enabled, the alarm reporting status at the port is the same as the actual status. After alarm reversion is manually disabled, the alarm reversion status changes to the non-revertive mode. Then, the alarm reporting status at the port is the same as the actual status.
Pay attention to the following points when you set the alarm reversion function:
l
Alarm reversion does not change the actual status of alarms on the board, as well as the indication status of the alarm indicators. Alarm reversion is implemented by the NE software. The alarm data is the same on the NE and the NMS, which indicates the status after the alarm reversion. If you directly query the alarm data of a board, however, the actual alarm status is returned. Alarm reversion is set on the basis of a port. Alarm reversion is supported by each port of the PH1, and IF0.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-3
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
E Alarm Management
E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold

When the number of bit errors detected by a board exceeds a specified value, the board generates a bit error alarm. This specified value is the bit error alarm threshold, and the setting of this threshold is supported by all the bit error threshold-crossing and degrading alarms on the OptiX RTN 605. Table E-1 Setting of the bit error alarm threshold Alarm Name MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD Default Alarm Threshold 10-3 10-6 Applicable Board IF0 and IFH1
E-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
F Performance Event Management
Performance Event Management
Performance event management of the OptiX RTN 605 is classified into NE performance event management and board performance event management. F.1 NE Performance Event Management The NE performance event management function set by a user is applicable to all the boards on an NE. F.2 Board Performance Event Management The performance event management function is valid for only a board on which a user configures this function.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
F-1
F Performance Event Management
F.1 NE Performance Event Management

The NE performance event management function set by a user is applicable to all the boards on an NE. The NE performance event management function supported by OptiX RTN 605 includes:
l l
Sets the monitoring of NE performance events Sets the start/end time of performance events
For details about these functions, see the manuals or online Help of the NMS.
F.2 Board Performance Event Management

The performance event management function is valid for only a board on which a user configures this function. Table F-1 Board performance event management function Function Sets 15-minute/24-hour performance monitoring. Sets 15-minute/24-hour performance event autoreporting. Sets performance thresholds. Resets the performance register. Generates performance threshold-crossing alarms. Monitors UAT events. Monitors CSES performance events. Applicable Board SCC, IF0, IFH1, ODU, EMS4, and EM4T
SCC, IF0, IFH1, ODU, EMS4, and EM4T
IFH1, IF0, EMS4, and EM4T IFH1, IF0, ODU, EMS4, and EM4T IFH1, IF0, EMS4, and EM4T
IFH1 and IF0 IFH1 and IF0
F-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
G Alarm Suppression Relationship
G
MW_LOF R_LOF T_ALOS
Alarm Suppression Relationship
Table G-1 Suppression relationship between intra-board alarms Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm R_LOS, R_LOF, R_LOC, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_RDI, MW_LIM, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD R_LOF, MW_RDI, MW_LIM, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD MW_RDI, MW_LIM, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD E1_LOC and UP_E1_AIS MW_BER_SD
R_LOS and R_LOC
MW_BER_EXC
Table G-2 Suppression relationship between inter-board alarms Alarm Identifier R_LOS, R_LOF, MW_LOF, and MW_LIM Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm DOWN_E1_AIS
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
G-1
H Glossary
H
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. H.1 0-9 H.2 A-E H.3 F-J H.4 K-O H.5 P-T H.6 U-Z
Glossary
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-1
H Glossary
H.1 0-9
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided. The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.) 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLAN tags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQ feature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.
1U 802.1Q in 802.1Q
H.2 A-E
A
ABR ACAP Access Control List See Available Bit Rate See adjacent channel alternate polarization Access Control List (ACL) is a list of IP address. The addresses listed in the ACL are used for authentication. If the ACL for the user is not null, it indicates that the address where the user logged in is contained in the list. See Access Control List A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. See Analog to Digital Converter Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.
ACL adaptive modulation
ADC add/drop multiplexer
Address Resolution Protocol
H-2
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
adjacent channel alternate polarization ADM Administrative Unit
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. See Assured Forwarding See Automatic Gain Control A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects. See Alarm Indication Signal When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE. A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. Note: See ITU-T Rec. G.707/Y.1322 for specific AIS signals. A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. See adaptive modulation An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). See Automatic Protection Switching See Address Resolution Protocol amplitude shift keying Assured Forwarding (AF) is one of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. AF is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Permanent Virtual Circuit
AF AGC aggregation AIS Alarm automatic report alarm cascading Alarm Filtering
Alarm Indication Signal Alarm suppression
AM Analog to Digital Converter APS ARP ASK Assured Forwarding
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM ATM PVC
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-3
H Glossary
ATPC attenuator AU Automatic Gain Control Automatic Protection Switching automatic transmit power control Available Bit Rate
See automatic transmit power control A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fibre Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. See Administrative Unit A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
B
Backward Defect Indication bandwidth When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Power control, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network. Base Transceiver Station BDI BE BER best effort A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. See Backward Defect Indication See best effort See Bit Error Rate A kind of PHB (Per-Hop-Behavior). In the forwarding process of a DS domain, the traffic of this PHB type features reachability but the DS node does not guarantee the forwarding quality. Basic Input Output System Bit-Interleaved Parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.
BIOS BIP bit error Bit Error Rate
H-4
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
blank filler panel BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep proper airflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance. See Bridge Protocol Data Unit The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. See Base Station Controller See Base Transceiver Station A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices.
Broadcast BSC BTS Buffer
C
C-VLAN cable ladder Customer VLAN (1) A cable ladder is a frame which supports electrical cables. (2) Two metal cables usually made of stainless steel with rungs of lightweight metal tubing such as aluminum, six or eight inches wide spaced about eighteen inches apart. It can be rolled into a compact lightweight bundle for transport ease. The tape used to bind the cables. The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet. Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing. See committed access rate See Constant Bit Rate See Circuit Cross Connect See Co-Channel Dual Polarization See continuity check message See Customer Edge The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processor or central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place. See Circuit Emulation Service See compact flash Cisco Group Management Protocol Cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order.
cable tie cabling trough captive nut
CAR CBR CCC CCDP CCM CE Central Processing Unit CES CF CGMP
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-5
H Glossary
CIR Circuit Cross Connect Circuit Emulation Service
See Committed Information Rate An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. See Common and Internal Spanning Tree A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network. A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs, the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from high to low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the services of low priority. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. Two or multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are combined to serve as one BTS. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket.
CIST CIST root Class of Service
Clock tracing Co-Channel Dual Polarization Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing Colored packet Combined cabinet committed access rate
Committed Information Rate
Common and Internal Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP and Spanning Tree RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridges and regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local Area Network are simply and fully connected. compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. A plate that connects two adjacent cabinet together at the cabinet top for fixing.
Concatenation connecting plate for combining cabinets
H-6
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Connectivity Check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. This detection is called CC detection. constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed using CSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortest path algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. A constraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidth guaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of link traversed etc. CSPF is widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known as Constraint Based Routing (CBR). An alternative to RSVP (Resource ReSerVation Protocol) in MPLS (MultiProtocol Label Switching) networks. RSVP, which works at the IP (Internet Protocol) level, uses IP or UDP datagrams to communicate between LSR (Label Switched Routing) peers. RSVP does not require the maintenance of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) sessions, although RSVP must assume responsibility for error control. CR-LDP is designed to facilitate the routing of LSPs (Label Switched Paths) through TCP sessions between LSR peers through the communication of label distribution messages during the session. CCM is used to detect the link status. A pipe which is used for fiber routing. See Class of Service See Central Processing Unit See Constraint-based Routed-Label Distribution Protocol See Cyclic Redundancy Check A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP. See Constraint Shortest Path First A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
Constant Bit Rate
Constraint Shortest Path First
Constraint-based Routed-Label Distribution Protocol
continuity check message corrugated tube CoS CPU CR-LDP CRC cross polarization interference cancellation CSPF Customer Edge CWDM Cyclic Redundancy Check
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-7
H Glossary
D
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Data Communication Network Also Data Communications Equipment (DCE) and Data Carrier Equipment (DCE). The basic function of a DCE is to convert data from one interface, such as a digital signal, to another interface, such as an analog signal. One example of DCE is a modem. A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).
Data Communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to Channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. Datagram DC DC-C DC-I DC-Return Common (with Ground) DC-Return Isolate (with Ground) DCC DCE DCN DDF DDN DE Detour LSP diamond-shaped nut A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See Direct Current See DC-Return Common (with Ground) See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground) A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. See Data Communications Channel See Data Circuit-terminal Equipment See Data Communication Network See Digital Distribution Frame See Digital Data Network See discard eligible The LSP that is used to re-route traffic around a failure in one-to-one backup. A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.
Differentiated Services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. Differentiated Services Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits Code Point 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB according to the DSCP value. DiffServ Digital Data Network See Differentiated Services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.
H-8
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Digital Distribution Frame digital modulation
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See Differentiated Services Code Point
Direct Current discard eligible
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DS boundary node DS domain
DS interior node DS node DSCP
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-AGGR E-LAN E-Tree EBS ECC EF EFM Electro Magnetic Interference Ethernet-Aggregation See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet-Tree See Excess Burst Size See Embedded Control Channel See Expedited Forwarding See Ethernet in the First mile Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-9
H Glossary
electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. [NTIA]
ElectroStatic Discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. Embedded Control Channel EMC EMI Engineering label EPLn equalization ERPS ES-IS ESD ESD jack ETH-CC ETH-LB ETH-LT Ethernet An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. See electromagnetic compatibility See Electro Magnetic Interference A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet Private LAN A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. See ethernet ring protection switching End System to Intermediate System See ElectroStatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. Ethernet Continuity Check Ethernet Loopback Ethernet Link Trace A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.bis technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD). Ethernet LAN. A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2 switch. Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies. A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service. etherenet tree. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection.
Ethernet in the First mile
Ethernet LAN
Ethernet Private LAN ethernet ring protection switching Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Ethernet-Tree
H-10
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
ETS ETSI ETSI 300mm cabinet European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL EVPLn Excess Burst Size
European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Ethernet Virtual Private Line See Ethernet Virtual Private LAN excess burst size. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is realized by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed.
Exercise Switching
Expedited Forwarding Expedited Forwarding (EF) is the highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
H.3 F-J
F
Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies with the IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard. The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation. Frame Check Sequence See frequency diversity See Forward Defect Indication See Fast Ethernet See Forward Error Correction Fast Failure Detection A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).
Fast Ethernet fast link pulse FCS FD FDI FE FEC FFD Fiber Connector
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-11
H Glossary
fiber patch cord Field Programmable Gate Array
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arraies. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. See fast link pulse This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards are satisfying a higher priority bridge request. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. See Field Programmable Gate Array Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that can not support the original size of the packet. A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. See File Transfer Protocol The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.
FIFO File Transfer Protocol
First in First out FLP Forced switch
Forward Defect Indication
Forward Error Correction Forwarding plane FPGA Fragment Fragmentation frame
frequency diversity
FTP Full duplex
H-12
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
G
gateway network element GCP GE A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See GMPLS control plan See Gigabit Ethernet
Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users . The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System See Graceful Restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/ MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-Intermediate System (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwarding is not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocols at the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This series of standards is called Graceful Restart. A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. (electricity) Opposition of the earth to the flow of current through it; its value depends on the nature and moisture content of the soil, on the material, composition, and nature of connections to the earth, and on the electrolytic action present. See Generic traffic shaping See Graphical User Interface Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
Global Positioning System GMPLS control plan
GNE GPS GR Graceful Restart
Graphical User Interface ground resistance
GTS GUI guide rail
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-13
H Glossary
H
H-QoS HA half-duplex Hierarchical Quality of Service See High Availability A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. High Density Bipolar Code 3 See High level Data Link Control procedure The ability of a system to continuously perform its functions during a long period, which may exceeds the suggested working time of the independent components. You can obtain the high availability (HA) by using the error tolerance method. Based on learning cases one by one, you must also clearly understand the limitations of the system that requires an HA ability and the degree to which the ability can reach. A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links. Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocols including X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLC have been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP). A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. Higher Order Path See High Speed Downlink Packet Access Hitless Switch Mode High Tributary Bus The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.
HDB3 HDLC High Availability
High level Data Link Control procedure
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Hold priority
Hop hot standby
HP HSDPA HSM HTB hybrid radio
I
ICMP IDU
H-14
See Internet Control Messages Protocol See indoor unit

H Glossary
IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping
See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers The Internet Engineering Task Force See intermediate frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
IMA indoor unit Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Interface board area
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol Intermediate System (IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm to calculate the route. Internal Spanning Tree Internal spanning tree. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization Internet Control Messages Protocol Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer and publisher of International Standards. ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messages during the transmission of IP-type data packets. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-15
H Glossary
Internet Protocol Version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. Inverse Multiplexing over ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See Internet Protocol Version 6 See Intermediate System to Intermediate System See International Organization for Standardization See Internal Spanning Tree International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector Independence VLAN learning
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IP IPv6 IS-IS ISO IST ITU-T IVL
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
H.4 K-O
L
L2VPN Label Switched Path See Layer 2 virtual private network A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
Label Switching Router The Label Switching Router (LSR) is the basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. LACP LAG LAN LAPD LAPS See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See Local Area Network Link Access Procedure on the D channel Link Access Procedure-SDH
H-16
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
layer 2 switch
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network realized in the packet switched (IP/MPLS) network by Layer network 2 switching technologies. LB LCAS LDPC line rate forwarding Link Aggregation Control Protocol See Loopback See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Low-Density Parity Check code The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad) that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Link Protection The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. Linear Multiplex Section Protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame Loss Of Multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See Loss Of Pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
LMSP Local Area Network
Locked switching
LOF LOM Loopback LOP LOS Loss Of Frame
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-17
H Glossary
Loss Of Pointer
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. Lower Order Path Link State Path Through See Label Switched Path See Label Switching Router
Loss Of Signal Lower subrack LP LPT LSP LSR
M
MA MAC MAC MADM Maintenance Association Maintenance association End Point See Maintenance Association See Medium Access Control See Media Access Control Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability. The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can be sent over a network. Maximum Burst Size See Message Communication Function See Maintenance Domain See Medium Dependent Interface The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Maintenance Domain Maintenance Point Management Information Base Manual switching
Maximum Transfer Unit MBS MCF MD MDI Mean Time To Repair
H-18
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Media Access Control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particular network. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses. The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission. See Maintenance association End Point The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs . See Management Information Base Maintenance Intermediate Point See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol An L-shape steel sheet. One side is fixed on the front panel with screws, and the other side is fixed on the installation hole with screws. On both sides of a rack, there is an Lshaped metal fastener. This ensures that internal components are closely connected with the rack. Normally, an internal component is installed with two mount angles. See Maintenance Point Maintenance Point Identification See Multi-Protocol Label Switch The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network.In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. Multiprotocol Label Switching Traffic Engineering In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. See Multiplex Section See multiplex section protection
Medium Access Control Medium Dependent Interface MEP Message Communication Function MIB MIP MLPPP mount angle
MP MPID MPLS MPLS L2VPN
MPLS OAM
MPLS TE MPLS TE tunnel
MS MSP
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-19
H Glossary
MSTI MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multi-link Point to Point Protocol Multi-Protocol Label Switch
See Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Mean Time Between Failure See Mean Time To Repair See Maximum Transfer Unit A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line, doubling connection rates to 128Kbps. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs. Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST region are as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation between the VLAN ID to MSTI The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Multicast
Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple Spanning Tree Region
Multiplex Section multiplex section protection
N
N+1 protection NE NE Explorer A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. See Network Element The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
H-20
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Network Element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board. The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
network management system
Network Service Access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can Point access OSI network services. Network to Network Interface next hop NLP NMS NNHOP NNI Node This is an internal interface within a network linking two or more elements. The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination. Normal Link Pulse See network management system Next-Next-Hop See Network to Network Interface A node stands for a managed device in the network.For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device.For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device.Therefore, a node does not always mean a device. A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer. See non-gateway network element See Network Service Access Point Not Stop Forwarding Network Serial Multiplexed Interface
Node Protection
non-gateway network element non-GNE NSAP NSF NSMI
O
OAM ODF ODU One-to-One Backup Open Shortest Path First See Operation, Administration and Maintenanc See Optical Distribution Frame See outdoor unit A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR. A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-21
H Glossary
Open Systems Interconnection
A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization of Standards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in a telecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions that take place at each end of a communication. Operation, Administration and Maintenance. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. See Open Systems Interconnection OptiX Software Platform See Open Shortest Path First The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals. A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Operation, Administration and Maintenanc
Optical Distribution Frame orderwire OSI OSP OSPF outdoor unit Outloop Output optical power
H.5 P-T
P
Packet over SDH/ SONET packet switched network Packing case Path/Channel A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is disassembled. See peak burst size See Printed Circuit Board PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems. See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Protocol Data Unit See Provider Edge
PBS PCB PCI bus PDH PDU PE

H-22
H Glossary
peak burst size
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Penultimate Hop Popping Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). A forwarding behavior applied at a DS-compliant node. This behavior belongs to the behavior aggregate defined in the DiffServ domain. See Per-Hop-Behavior See Penultimate Hop Popping Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode See Peak Information Rate
Per-Hop-Behavior PHB PHP PIM-DM PIM-SM PIR
Plesiochronous Digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum Hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. See Packet over SDH/SONET A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. See Point-to-Point Protocol Provider Provisioned VPN See Priority Queuing Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence Primary Reference Clock A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
POS Power box PPP PPVPN PQ PRBS PRC Printed Circuit Board
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-23
H Glossary
Priority Queuing
A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it An area for the processing boards on the subrack. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Processing board area protection grounding cable Protection path
Protocol Independent A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and interMulticast-Sparse Mode domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is not dependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparsemode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (and their routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicast routing protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere and then pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructs a tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets from the sender then follow this tree. Provider Edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE. An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW. Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge to Edge (PWE3) is a type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. See packet switched network Packet Transport Network See Pseudo wire See Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge
Pseudo wire
Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-toEdge
PSN PTN PW PWE3
Q
QoS QPSK See Quality of Service See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmission Keying through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
H-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Quality of Service
Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability, service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
R
Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources. A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. See Remote Defect Indication The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER. See Random Early Detection See Remote Error Indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal. A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. A manage information base (MIB) defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). RMON is mainly used to monitor the data flow of one network segment or the entire network. The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate. See Radio Freqency Request For Comment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. H-25
Radio Network Controller Random Early Detection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RDI Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Sensitivity RED REI Remote Defect Indication Remote Error Indication
remote network monitoring Resource Reservation Protocol
Reverse pressure
RF RFC
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
RIP RMON RNC Root alarm route Routing Information Protocol
See Routing Information Protocol See remote network monitoring See Radio Network Controller An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. Reed-Solomon encoding Received Signal Level See Received Signal Strength Indicator See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol Radio Transmission Node
routing table
RS RSL RSSI RSTP RSVP RTN
S
SD SDH SDP SEMF Service Level Agreement See space diversity See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Serious Disturbance Period Synchronous Equipment Management Function A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure. Severely Errored Second The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels. See Signal Fail See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SES Setup Priority
SF SFP
H-26
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
side trough signal cable Signal Fail Signal Noise Ratio
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active. The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Of or relating to a telecommunications system in which only one message can be sent in either direction at one time. See Service Level Agreement To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See SubNetwork Connection See SubNetwork Connection Protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See Signal Noise Ratio Strict Priority A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Simple Network Management Protocol
simplex SLA Slicing Small Form-Factor Pluggable SNC SNCP SNMP SNR SP space diversity
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM Static Virtual Circuit See Synchronization Status Message Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM STM-1 See synchronous transport module SDH Transport Module -1
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-27
H Glossary
STM-1e STM-1o STP sub-network
STM-1 Electrical Interface STM-1 Optical Interface See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address. A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnet mask
SubNetwork Connection
SubNetwork A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if Connection Protection the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC SVL Switch See Static Virtual Circuit Shared VLAN Learning To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
Synchronization Status A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous Message timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold), and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous transport An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields module organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
H-28
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. Tag Control Information See TransmissionControl Protocol See Time Division Multiplexing See traffic engineering See Traffic Engineering DataBase
Tail drop
TCI TCP TDM TE TEDB
Telecommunication The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-T Management Network for managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. TIM Time Division Multiplexing Trace Identifier Mismatch It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3......), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Telecommunication Management Network A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header. See Tributary Protection Switch A task that effectively maps the service flows to the existing physical topology. TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network. It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Time To Live
TMN ToS priority TPS traffic engineering Traffic Engineering DataBase
Traffic shaping
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-29
H Glossary
trail
A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred signals. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. See Two Rate Three Color Marker See Time To Live Tributary Unit A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
TransmissionControl Protocol
Tributary Protection Switch trTCM TTL TU Tunnel
Two Rate Three Color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.
H.6 U-Z
U
UAS UBR UDP underfloor cabling UNI Unicast Unspecified Bit Rate Unavailable Second See Unspecified Bit Rate See User Datagram Protocol The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See User Network Interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. Uninterruptible Power Supply Cables or fibres connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
Upper subrack UPS upward cabling
H-30
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
User Datagram Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the interface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a private network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.
V
V-NNI V-UNI Variable Bit Rate See virtual network-network interface See Virtual User-Network Interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. See Variable Bit Rate See Virtual Channel Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Channel Connection See Virtual Chanel Connection See virtual concatenation group See Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Channel Connection. The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in the ATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by the sw virtual channel identifier. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparently transporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput.
VBR VC VC-12 VC-3 VC-4 VCC VCC,VPL VCG VCI Virtual Chanel Connection Virtual Channel
Virtual Channel Identifier virtual concatenation group Virtual Leased Line
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-31
H Glossary
Virtual Local Area Network virtual networknetwork interface
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface.
Virtual Path Identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs. Virtual Private LAN Service Virtual Private Network Virtual Private Wire Service Virtual Routing and Forwarding A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN. The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet. A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN. A technology included in IP (Internet Protocol) network routers that allows multiple instances of a routing table to exist in a router and work simultaneously.
Virtual Switch Instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW. Virtual User-Network Interface VLAN VLL Voice over IP virtual user-network interface. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service claissification and traffic control in HQoS. See Virtual Local Area Network See Virtual Leased Line An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See Voice over IP See Virtual Path Identifier See Virtual Private LAN Service See Virtual Private Network See Virtual Private Wire Service See Virtual Routing and Forwarding See Virtual Switch Instance
VoIP VPI VPLS VPN VPWS VRF VSI
W
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from. See Wide Area Network
WAN
H-32
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H Glossary
Web LCT
The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network
Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) is a fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled. Weighted Random Early Detection WFQ Wide Area Network A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. See Weighted Fair Queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. Wire speed refers to the maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of wire speed equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. Wholesale Managed Services See Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted Round Robin See Wait to Restore Time
Winding pipe wire speed WMS WRED WRR WTR
X
XPD XPIC Cross-Polarization Discrimination See cross polarization interference cancellation
Issue 03 (2010-05-30)
H-33

RTN 605 Maintenance Guide (V100R005C00 - 03)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTN 605 Maintenance Guide (V100R005C00 - 03)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX RTN 605 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

About This Document

About This Document

Product Name OptiX RTN 605 1F/2F iManager U2000

Version V100R003C00 V100R002C00

Network planning engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Update A Alarm Reference

Description Deleted the alarm SWDL_PKGVER_MM.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations............................................................................................2-1

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

B Abnormal Event Reference.....................................................................................................B-1

C Performance Event Reference................................................................................................C-1

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

D RMON Event Reference.........................................................................................................D-1

F Performance Event Management............................................................................................F-1

G Alarm Suppression Relationship.........................................................................................G-1 H Glossary.....................................................................................................................................H-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Local Rules and Regulations

Basic Requirements for Installation

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

1.2 Electrical Safety

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.3 Flammable Air Environment

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

1.5 Working at Heights

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Figure 1-2 Weight lifting

Using the Ladder

OptiX RTN 605 Maintenance Guide

Figure 1-3 Schematic diagram of slanting a ladder

When climbing the ladder, note the following points:

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.